blob: 9d4ea39ec73365aee0fafd590105976ef48e3c41 [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar89a9c152021-08-29 21:55:35 +02001*syntax.txt* For Vim version 8.2. Last change: 2021 Aug 16
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002
3
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
5
6
7Syntax highlighting *syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring*
8
9Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or
10color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim
11doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its
12limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody
13calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that.
14
15Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary
16terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the
17GUI version, gvim.
18
19In the User Manual:
20|usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting.
21|usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file.
22
231. Quick start |:syn-qstart|
242. Syntax files |:syn-files|
253. Syntax loading procedure |syntax-loading|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100264. Converting to HTML |2html.vim|
275. Syntax file remarks |:syn-file-remarks|
286. Defining a syntax |:syn-define|
297. :syntax arguments |:syn-arguments|
308. Syntax patterns |:syn-pattern|
319. Syntax clusters |:syn-cluster|
Bram Moolenaarc8c88492018-12-27 23:59:26 +01003210. Including syntax files |:syn-include|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003311. Synchronizing |:syn-sync|
3412. Listing syntax items |:syntax|
3513. Highlight command |:highlight|
3614. Linking groups |:highlight-link|
3715. Cleaning up |:syn-clear|
3816. Highlighting tags |tag-highlight|
3917. Window-local syntax |:ownsyntax|
4018. Color xterms |xterm-color|
4119. When syntax is slow |:syntime|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000042
43{Vi does not have any of these commands}
44
45Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been
46disabled at compile time.
47
48==============================================================================
491. Quick start *:syn-qstart*
50
51 *:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable*
52This command switches on syntax highlighting: >
53
54 :syntax enable
55
56What this command actually does is to execute the command >
57 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
58
59If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find
60the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|). Usually this works just
61fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the
62directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files
Bram Moolenaar8024f932020-01-14 19:29:13 +010063are in the "/usr/vim/vim82/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to
64"/usr/vim/vim82". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim.
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +010065This command also sources the |menu.vim| script when the GUI is running or
66will start soon. See |'go-M'| about avoiding that.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000067
68 *:syn-on* *:syntax-on*
Bram Moolenaar4072ba52020-12-23 13:56:35 +010069The `:syntax enable` command will keep most of your current color settings.
70This allows using `:highlight` commands to set your preferred colors before or
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000071after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the
72defaults, use: >
73 :syntax on
74<
75 *:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal*
76If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background
77with: >
78 :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White
79For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|.
80For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|.
81
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +010082NOTE: The syntax files on MS-Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000083The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +010084file for your system. Although on MS-Windows the right format is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000085automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty.
86
87NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value
88of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000089reading the |gvimrc|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000090used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000091highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000092
93 :gui " open window and set default for 'background'
94 :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors
95
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000096NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000097foreground! Use ":gui -f" then.
98
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +020099 *g:syntax_on*
100You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command: >
101 :if exists("g:syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000102
103To put this into a mapping, you can use: >
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +0200104 :map <F7> :if exists("g:syntax_on") <Bar>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000105 \ syntax off <Bar>
106 \ else <Bar>
107 \ syntax enable <Bar>
108 \ endif <CR>
109[using the |<>| notation, type this literally]
110
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000111Details:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000112The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how
113this works, look in the file:
114 command file ~
115 :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
116 :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
117 :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim
118 :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
119Also see |syntax-loading|.
120
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100121NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting
122makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value.
123
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000124==============================================================================
1252. Syntax files *:syn-files*
126
127The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in
128a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the
129name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters,
130a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem).
131Examples:
132 c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim
133 cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim
134
135The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But
136the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a
137language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one,
138for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: >
139 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim
140
141The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: >
142 :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim
143 :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim
144These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim.
145
146
147MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES *mysyntaxfile*
148
149When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these
150automatically with ":syntax enable", do this:
151
1521. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item
153 of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: >
154 mkdir ~/.vim
155
1562. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: >
157 mkdir ~/.vim/syntax
158
1593. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write
160 it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: >
161 :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim
162
163Now you can start using your syntax file manually: >
164 :set syntax=mine
165You don't have to exit Vim to use this.
166
167If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|.
168
169If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user
170to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'.
171
172
173ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-add*
174
175If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to
176add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps:
177
1781. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above.
179
1802. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: >
181 mkdir ~/.vim/after
182 mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax
183
1843. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For
185 example, to change the colors for the C syntax: >
186 highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green
187
1884. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the
189 syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: >
190 :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim
191
192That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be
193different. You don't even have to restart Vim.
194
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +0000195If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name.
196All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example:
197 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim
198 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim
199
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000200
201REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-replace*
202
203If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new
204version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above. Just make sure
205that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200206Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets
207b:current_syntax.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000208
209
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100210NAMING CONVENTIONS *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18*
211
212A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of
213thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color.
214A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself.
215
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000216The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +0100217and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*". However, Vim does not give
218an error when using other characters.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000219
Bram Moolenaareab6dff2020-03-01 19:06:45 +0100220To be able to allow each user to pick their favorite set of colors, there must
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000221be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages.
222These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly
223you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"):
224
225 *Comment any comment
226
227 *Constant any constant
228 String a string constant: "this is a string"
229 Character a character constant: 'c', '\n'
230 Number a number constant: 234, 0xff
231 Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false
232 Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10
233
234 *Identifier any variable name
235 Function function name (also: methods for classes)
236
237 *Statement any statement
238 Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc.
239 Repeat for, do, while, etc.
240 Label case, default, etc.
241 Operator "sizeof", "+", "*", etc.
242 Keyword any other keyword
243 Exception try, catch, throw
244
245 *PreProc generic Preprocessor
246 Include preprocessor #include
247 Define preprocessor #define
248 Macro same as Define
249 PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc.
250
251 *Type int, long, char, etc.
252 StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc.
253 Structure struct, union, enum, etc.
254 Typedef A typedef
255
256 *Special any special symbol
257 SpecialChar special character in a constant
258 Tag you can use CTRL-] on this
259 Delimiter character that needs attention
260 SpecialComment special things inside a comment
261 Debug debugging statements
262
263 *Underlined text that stands out, HTML links
264
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200265 *Ignore left blank, hidden |hl-Ignore|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000266
267 *Error any erroneous construct
268
269 *Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the
270 keywords TODO FIXME and XXX
271
272The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups.
273For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting.
274The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same
275highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands
276after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file.
277
278Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string"
279can be used for the same group.
280
281The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name:
282 NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained
283
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200284 *hl-Ignore*
285When using the Ignore group, you may also consider using the conceal
286mechanism. See |conceal|.
287
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000288==============================================================================
2893. Syntax loading procedure *syntax-loading*
290
291This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is
292issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are
293located. This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|.
294
295":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following:
296
297 Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
298 |
299 +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
300 |
301 +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath'
302 | |
303 | +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is
304 | | defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise
305 | | ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules
306 | | existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't
307 | | set yet.
308 | |
309 | +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when
310 | | the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1*
311 | |
312 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable.
313 | This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2*
314 |
315 +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any
316 | filetype.vim files found. It should always Source
317 | $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following.
318 | |
319 | +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option
320 | | This is where the connection between file name and file type is
321 | | made for known file types. *synload-3*
322 | |
323 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile*
324 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
325 | | *synload-4*
326 | |
327 | +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file
328 | | type was detected yet. *synload-5*
329 | |
330 | +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim|
331 |
332 +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file
333 | type has been detected. *synload-6*
334 |
335 +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each
336 already loaded buffer.
337
338
339Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows:
340
341 Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands.
342 |
343 +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from |synload-3|
344 | (known file types) or |synload-4| (user's file types), the 'filetype'
345 | option is set to the file type.
346 |
347 +- The autocommand at |synload-5| is triggered. If the file type was not
348 | found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This
349 | should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following.
350 | |
351 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myscriptsfile*
352 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
353 | |
354 | +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file,
355 | again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the
356 | file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'.
357 |
358 +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this
359 | triggers the FileType autocommand |synload-6| above. It sets
360 | 'syntax' to the determined file type.
361 |
362 +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand
363 | from |synload-1| (and |synload-2|). This find the main syntax file in
364 | 'runtimepath', with this command:
365 | runtime! syntax/<name>.vim
366 |
367 +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are
368 triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific
369 syntax.
370
371==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003724. Conversion to HTML *2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000373
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003742html is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200375window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000376
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200377After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The
378colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. With
379|g:html_line_ids| you can jump to specific lines by adding (for example) #L123
380or #123 to the end of the URL in your browser's address bar. And with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +0200381|g:html_dynamic_folds| enabled, you can show or hide the text that is folded
382in Vim.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200383
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000384You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"!
385Source the script to convert the current file: >
386
387 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
388<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200389Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off
390options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to
391the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using
392|:unlet|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000393
394Remarks:
Bram Moolenaar076e8b22010-08-05 21:54:00 +0200395- Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000396- From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)!
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200397- The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some
Bram Moolenaar166af9b2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100398 features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be
399 incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000400
401Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a
402Unix shell: >
403 for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done
404<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200405 *g:html_start_line* *g:html_end_line*
406To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml|
407command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first
408and last line to be converted. Example, using the last set Visual area: >
409
410 :let g:html_start_line = line("'<")
411 :let g:html_end_line = line("'>")
412 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
413<
414 *:TOhtml*
415:[range]TOhtml The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin.
416 This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200417 range is given, this command sets |g:html_start_line|
418 and |g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the
419 range, respectively. Default range is the entire
420 buffer.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200421
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200422 If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless
423 |g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert
424 all windows which are part of the diff in the current
425 tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element
426 in the generated HTML. With |g:html_line_ids| you can
427 jump to lines in specific windows with (for example)
428 #W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or
429 #W3L87 for line 87 in the third.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200430
431 Examples: >
432
433 :10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html
434 :'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection
435 :TOhtml " convert entire buffer
436<
437 *g:html_diff_one_file*
438Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200439When 0, and using |:TOhtml| all windows involved in a |diff| in the current tab
440page are converted to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element. When
4411, only the current buffer is converted.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200442Example: >
443
444 let g:html_diff_one_file = 1
445<
446 *g:html_whole_filler*
447Default: 0.
448When 0, if |g:html_diff_one_file| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines
449is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number
450of inserted lines.
451When 1, always display all inserted lines as if |g:html_diff_one_file| were
452not set.
453>
454 :let g:html_whole_filler = 1
455<
456 *TOhtml-performance* *g:html_no_progress*
457Default: 0.
458When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the
4592html.vim conversion process.
460When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement
461but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big
462files it can take a long time!
463Example: >
464
465 let g:html_no_progress = 1
466<
467You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not
468run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script
469moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: >
470
471 vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c
472<
473Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you
474need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML
475conversion. See |-E| and |-s-ex| for details. It is probably best to create a
476script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of
477specifying each command separately.
478
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100479 *hl-TOhtmlProgress* *TOhtml-progress-color*
480When displayed, the progress bar will show colored boxes along the statusline
481as the HTML conversion proceeds. By default, the background color as the
482current "DiffDelete" highlight group is used. If "DiffDelete" and "StatusLine"
483have the same background color, TOhtml will automatically adjust the color to
484differ. If you do not like the automatically selected colors, you can define
485your own highlight colors for the progress bar. Example: >
486
487 hi TOhtmlProgress guifg=#c0ffee ctermbg=7
488<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200489 *g:html_number_lines*
490Default: current 'number' setting.
491When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering.
492When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same
493highlighting as the line number column in Vim (|hl-LineNr|).
494Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: >
495 :let g:html_number_lines = 1
496Force to omit the line numbers: >
497 :let g:html_number_lines = 0
498Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
499 :unlet g:html_number_lines
500<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200501 *g:html_line_ids*
502Default: 1 if |g:html_number_lines| is set, 0 otherwise.
503When 1, adds an HTML id attribute to each line number, or to an empty <span>
504inserted for that purpose if no line numbers are shown. This ID attribute
505takes the form of L123 for single-buffer HTML pages, or W2L123 for diff-view
506pages, and is used to jump to a specific line (in a specific window of a diff
507view). Javascript is inserted to open any closed dynamic folds
Bram Moolenaar34401cc2014-08-29 15:12:19 +0200508(|g:html_dynamic_folds|) containing the specified line before jumping. The
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200509javascript also allows omitting the window ID in the url, and the leading L.
510For example: >
511
512 page.html#L123 jumps to line 123 in a single-buffer file
513 page.html#123 does the same
514
515 diff.html#W1L42 jumps to line 42 in the first window in a diff
516 diff.html#42 does the same
517<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200518 *g:html_use_css*
519Default: 1.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100520When 1, generate valid HTML 5 markup with CSS styling, supported in all modern
521browsers and many old browsers.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200522When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not
523recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients,
524forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable.
525Example: >
526 :let g:html_use_css = 0
527<
528 *g:html_ignore_conceal*
529Default: 0.
530When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character
531from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current
532value of 'conceallevel'.
533When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is
534|conceal|ed.
535
536Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is
537included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): >
538 :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1
539 :setl conceallevel=0
540<
541 *g:html_ignore_folding*
542Default: 0.
543When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in
544Vim (|fold-foldtext|). See |g:html_dynamic_folds| if you also want to allow
545the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside.
546When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the
547text is in a fold has no impact at all. |g:html_dynamic_folds| has no effect.
548
549Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included
550in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): >
551 zR
552 :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1
553<
554 *g:html_dynamic_folds*
555Default: 0.
556When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML.
557When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like
558in Vim.
559
560Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling,
561regardless of what |g:html_use_css| is set to.
562
563This variable is ignored when |g:html_ignore_folding| is set.
564>
565 :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1
566<
567 *g:html_no_foldcolumn*
568Default: 0.
569When 0, if |g:html_dynamic_folds| is 1, generate a column of text similar to
570Vim's foldcolumn (|fold-foldcolumn|) the user can click on to toggle folds
571open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current
572'foldcolumn' setting.
573When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over
574folded text will open the fold as if |g:html_hover_unfold| were set.
575>
576 :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1
577<
578 *TOhtml-uncopyable-text* *g:html_prevent_copy*
579Default: empty string.
580This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied,
581when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful
582for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or
583line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be
584affected in this way as follows:
585 f: fold column
586 n: line numbers (also within fold text)
587 t: fold text
588 d: diff filler
589
590Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: >
591 :let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn"
592<
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100593The method used to prevent copying in the generated page depends on the value
594of |g:html_use_input_for_pc|.
595
596 *g:html_use_input_for_pc*
597Default: "fallback"
598If |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty, then:
599
600When "all", read-only <input> elements are used in place of normal text for
601uncopyable regions. In some browsers, especially older browsers, after
602selecting an entire page and copying the selection, the <input> tags are not
603pasted with the page text. If |g:html_no_invalid| is 0, the <input> tags have
604invalid type; this works in more browsers, but the page will not validate.
605Note: this method does NOT work in recent versions of Chrome and equivalent
606browsers; the <input> tags get pasted with the text.
607
608When "fallback" (default value), the same <input> elements are generated for
609older browsers, but newer browsers (detected by CSS feature query) hide the
610<input> elements and instead use generated content in an ::before pseudoelement
611to display the uncopyable text. This method should work with the largest
612number of browsers, both old and new.
613
614When "none", the <input> elements are not generated at all. Only the
615generated-content method is used. This means that old browsers, notably
616Internet Explorer, will either copy the text intended not to be copyable, or
617the non-copyable text may not appear at all. However, this is the most
618standards-based method, and there will be much less markup.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200619
620 *g:html_no_invalid*
621Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100622When 0, if |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty and |g:html_use_input_for_pc| is
623not "none", an invalid attribute is intentionally inserted into the <input>
624element for the uncopyable areas. This prevents pasting the <input> elements
625in some applications. Specifically, some versions of Microsoft Word will not
626paste the <input> elements if they contain this invalid attribute. When 1, no
627invalid markup is inserted, and the generated page should validate. However,
628<input> elements may be pasted into some applications and can be difficult to
629remove afterward.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200630
631 *g:html_hover_unfold*
632Default: 0.
633When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with
634|g:html_dynamic_folds| set, is to click on the generated fold column.
635When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse
636cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with
637disabled javascript to view the folded text.
638
639Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this
640feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the
641normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but
642they will not be openable without a foldcolumn.
643>
644 :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1
645<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200646 *g:html_id_expr*
647Default: ""
648Dynamic folding and jumping to line IDs rely on unique IDs within the document
649to work. If generated HTML is copied into a larger document, these IDs are no
650longer guaranteed to be unique. Set g:html_id_expr to an expression Vim can
651evaluate to get a unique string to append to each ID used in a given document,
652so that the full IDs will be unique even when combined with other content in a
653larger HTML document. Example, to append _ and the buffer number to each ID: >
654
655 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_".bufnr("%")'
656<
657To append a string "_mystring" to the end of each ID: >
658
659 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_mystring"'
660<
661Note, when converting a diff view to HTML, the expression will only be
662evaluated for the first window in the diff, and the result used for all the
663windows.
664
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200665 *TOhtml-wrap-text* *g:html_pre_wrap*
666Default: current 'wrap' setting.
667When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does
668not wrap at the edge of the browser window.
669When 1, if |g:html_use_css| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is
670used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser
671window.
672Explicitly enable text wrapping: >
673 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1
674Explicitly disable wrapping: >
675 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0
676Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: >
677 :unlet g:html_pre_wrap
678<
679 *g:html_no_pre*
680Default: 0.
681When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre>
682tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab
683characters can be included literally (see |g:html_expand_tabs|).
684When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is
685used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of &nbsp; character
686references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow
687text in the generated HTML is wrap (see |g:html_pre_wrap|) which also works in
688old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and
689the rendered page generated by 2html.vim.
690>
691 :let g:html_no_pre = 1
692<
693 *g:html_expand_tabs*
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100694Default: 0 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, 'vartabstop' is not in use,
695 and no fold column or line numbers occur in the generated HTML;
696 1 otherwise.
697When 1, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200698number of space characters, or &nbsp; references if |g:html_no_pre| is 1.
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100699When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200700are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to
701allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in
702the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and
703indentation in the HTML, unless set by default.
704
705Force |2html.vim| to keep <Tab> characters: >
706 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0
707<
708Force tabs to be expanded: >
709 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1
710<
711 *TOhtml-encoding-detect* *TOhtml-encoding*
712It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with
713|g:html_use_encoding| for any content which will be placed on a web server.
714
715If you do not specify an encoding, |2html.vim| uses the preferred IANA name
716for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not.
717'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be
718set to match the chosen document encoding.
719
720Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in
721|encoding-names|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with
722wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific
723encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options
724below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names.
725
726Note, by default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in
727the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C:
728
729 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings
730 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark
731
732 *g:html_use_encoding*
733Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above.
734To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the
735name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to
736something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a
737webserver: >
738 :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8"
739You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset
740entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): >
741 :let g:html_use_encoding = ""
742To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the |g:html_use_encoding|
743variable: >
744 :unlet g:html_use_encoding
745<
746 *g:html_encoding_override*
747Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
748 mentioned by name at |encoding-names|.
749This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you
750specify an encoding with |g:html_use_encoding| which is not in the default
751list of conversions.
752
753This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing
754pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs.
755
756Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": >
757 :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'}
758<
759 *g:html_charset_override*
760Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
761 mentioned by name at |encoding-names| and which have wide
762 browser support.
763This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the HTML charset for any
764'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also
765use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example,
766TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16
767and UTF-32 instead, use: >
768 :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'}
769
770Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
771compatibility problems with some major browsers.
772
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200773 *g:html_font*
774Default: "monospace"
775You can specify the font or fonts used in the converted document using
776g:html_font. If this option is set to a string, then the value will be
777surrounded with single quotes. If this option is set to a list then each list
778item is surrounded by single quotes and the list is joined with commas. Either
779way, "monospace" is added as the fallback generic family name and the entire
780result used as the font family (using CSS) or font face (if not using CSS).
781Examples: >
782
783 " font-family: 'Consolas', monospace;
784 :let g:html_font = "Consolas"
785
786 " font-family: 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Consolas', monospace;
787 :let g:html_font = ["DejaVu Sans Mono", "Consolas"]
788<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200789 *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml*
790Default: 0.
791When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible).
792When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML).
793>
794 :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1
795<
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100796==============================================================================
7975. Syntax file remarks *:syn-file-remarks*
798
799 *b:current_syntax-variable*
800Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the
801"b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other
802settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: >
803 :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh"
804 :au BufReadPost * do-some-things
805 :au BufReadPost * endif
806
807
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000808
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000809ABEL *abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000810
811ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign
812any value to the respective variable. Example: >
813 :let abel_obsolete_ok=1
814To disable them use ":unlet". Example: >
815 :unlet abel_obsolete_ok
816
817Variable Highlight ~
818abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors
819abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader
820
821
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000822ADA
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000823
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000824See |ft-ada-syntax|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000825
826
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000827ANT *ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000828
829The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000830by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000831by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000832and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000833
834 :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim')
835
836will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code >
837
838 <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[
839 # everything inside is highlighted as perl
840 ]]></script>
841
842See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently.
843
844
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000845APACHE *apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000846
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +0100847The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting for Apache HTTP server
848version 2.2.3.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000849
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000850
851 *asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k*
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000852ASSEMBLY *ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax*
853 *ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000854
855Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection
856doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
857startup vimrc: >
858 :let filetype_i = "asm"
859Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use.
860
861There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name
862extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a
863line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax
864files are included:
865 asm GNU assembly (the default)
866 asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly
867 asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly
868 ia64 Intel Itanium 64
869 fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net)
870 masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86)
871 nasm Netwide assembly
872 tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and
873 MMX)
874 pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84)
875
876The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: >
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100877 asmsyntax=nasm
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000878Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100879one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +0200880immediately before or after this text. Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is
881equivalent to setting ft=foo in a |modeline|, and that in case of a conflict
882between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in
883particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax
884highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000885
886The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the
887b:asmsyntax variable: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000888 :let b:asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000889
890If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of
891the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly
892language: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000893 :let asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000894
895As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used.
896
897
898Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~
899
900To enable a feature: >
901 :let {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm
902To disable a feature: >
903 :unlet {variable} |set syntax=nasm
904
905Variable Highlight ~
906nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error
907 (parser dependent; not recommended)
908nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error
909nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo
910
911
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000912ASPPERL and ASPVBS *ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000913
914*.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's
915hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are
916using. For Perl script use: >
917 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl"
918 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl"
919For Visual Basic use: >
920 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs"
921 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs"
922
923
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000924BAAN *baan.vim* *baan-syntax*
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000925
Bram Moolenaar53f7fcc2021-07-28 20:10:16 +0200926The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV up to SSA ERP LN
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000927for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants
928are supported.
929
930Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify
931in ones |.vimrc|: >
932 let baan_code_stds=1
933
934*baan-folding*
935
936Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables
937mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on
938source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive.
939
940To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: >
941 let baan_fold=1
942Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The
943indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not
944considered equal to a tab). >
945 let baan_fold_block=1
946Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000947SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000948match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). >
949 let baan_fold_sql=1
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000950Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set|
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000951the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in
952.../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: >
953 set foldminlines=5
954 set foldnestmax=6
955
956
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000957BASIC *basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000958
959Both Visual Basic and "normal" basic use the extension ".bas". To detect
960which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first
961five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic",
962otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual
963Basic.
964
965
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000966C *c.vim* *ft-c-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000967
968A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100969(including zero) to the respective variable. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000970 :let c_comment_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100971 :let c_no_bracket_error = 0
972To disable them use `:unlet`. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000973 :unlet c_comment_strings
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100974Setting the value to zero doesn't work!
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000975
Bram Moolenaarba3ff532018-11-04 14:45:49 +0100976An alternative is to switch to the C++ highlighting: >
977 :set filetype=cpp
978
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000979Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200980*c_gnu* GNU gcc specific items
981*c_comment_strings* strings and numbers inside a comment
982*c_space_errors* trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab>
983*c_no_trail_space_error* ... but no trailing spaces
984*c_no_tab_space_error* ... but no spaces before a <Tab>
985*c_no_bracket_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors
986*c_no_curly_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors;
Bram Moolenaar677ee682005-01-27 14:41:15 +0000987 except { and } in first column
Bram Moolenaar09521312016-08-12 22:54:35 +0200988 Default is to highlight them, otherwise you
989 can't spot a missing ")".
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100990*c_curly_error* highlight a missing } by finding all pairs; this
991 forces syncing from the start of the file, can be slow
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200992*c_no_ansi* don't do standard ANSI types and constants
993*c_ansi_typedefs* ... but do standard ANSI types
994*c_ansi_constants* ... but do standard ANSI constants
995*c_no_utf* don't highlight \u and \U in strings
996*c_syntax_for_h* for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200997 syntax instead of objcpp
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200998*c_no_if0* don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
999*c_no_cformat* don't highlight %-formats in strings
1000*c_no_c99* don't highlight C99 standard items
1001*c_no_c11* don't highlight C11 standard items
1002*c_no_bsd* don't highlight BSD specific types
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001003
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001004When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will
1005become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: >
1006 :let c_no_comment_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaarf9393ef2006-04-24 19:47:27 +00001007"#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: >
1008 :let c_no_if0_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001009
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001010If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1011when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable
1012to a larger number: >
1013 :let c_minlines = 100
1014This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first
1015displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The
1016disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow.
1017
1018When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only
1019works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If
1020you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly.
1021
1022To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster.
1023Example: >
1024 :au Syntax c call MyCadd()
1025 :function MyCadd()
1026 : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni
1027 : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem
1028 : hi link cMyItem Title
1029 :endfun
1030
1031ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes
1032"NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is
1033not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant
1034highlighting: >
1035 :hi link cConstant NONE
1036
1037If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the
1038highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket.
1039
1040If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001041in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001042~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001043 syn sync fromstart
1044 set foldmethod=syntax
1045
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001046CH *ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00001047
1048C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon
1049the C syntax file. See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C.
1050
1051By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead
1052of C or C++: >
1053 :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1
1054
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001055
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001056CHILL *chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001057
1058Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See |c.vim| for all the settings
1059that are available. Additionally there is:
1060
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001061chill_space_errors like c_space_errors
1062chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings
1063chill_minlines like c_minlines
1064
1065
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001066CHANGELOG *changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001067
1068ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line.
1069If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: >
1070 let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0
1071This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use
1072"b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax
1073file).
1074
1075You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: >
1076 :hi link ChangelogError Error
1077Or to avoid the highlighting: >
1078 :hi link ChangelogError NONE
1079This works immediately.
1080
1081
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001082CLOJURE *ft-clojure-syntax*
1083
Bram Moolenaar6f1d9a02016-07-24 14:12:38 +02001084The default syntax groups can be augmented through the
1085*g:clojure_syntax_keywords* and *b:clojure_syntax_keywords* variables. The
1086value should be a |Dictionary| of syntax group names to a |List| of custom
1087identifiers:
1088>
1089 let g:clojure_syntax_keywords = {
1090 \ 'clojureMacro': ["defproject", "defcustom"],
1091 \ 'clojureFunc': ["string/join", "string/replace"]
1092 \ }
1093<
1094Refer to the Clojure syntax script for valid syntax group names.
1095
1096If the |buffer-variable| *b:clojure_syntax_without_core_keywords* is set, only
1097language constants and special forms are matched.
1098
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001099Setting *g:clojure_fold* enables folding Clojure code via the syntax engine.
1100Any list, vector, or map that extends over more than one line can be folded
1101using the standard Vim |fold-commands|.
1102
1103Please note that this option does not work with scripts that redefine the
1104bracket syntax regions, such as rainbow-parentheses plugins.
1105
1106This option is off by default.
1107>
1108 " Default
1109 let g:clojure_fold = 0
1110<
1111
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001112COBOL *cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001113
1114COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh
1115development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance
1116versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting,
1117add this line to your .vimrc: >
1118 :let cobol_legacy_code = 1
1119To disable it again, use this: >
1120 :unlet cobol_legacy_code
1121
1122
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001123COLD FUSION *coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001124
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001125The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001126comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1127
1128 :let html_wrong_comments = 1
1129
1130The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file.
1131
1132
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001133CPP *cpp.vim* *ft-cpp-syntax*
1134
Bram Moolenaar89a9c152021-08-29 21:55:35 +02001135Most things are the same as |ft-c-syntax|.
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001136
1137Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01001138cpp_no_cpp11 don't highlight C++11 standard items
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01001139cpp_no_cpp14 don't highlight C++14 standard items
Bram Moolenaar89a9c152021-08-29 21:55:35 +02001140cpp_no_cpp17 don't highlight C++17 standard items
1141cpp_no_cpp20 don't highlight C++20 standard items
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001142
1143
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001144CSH *csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001145
1146This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually
1147used.
1148
1149Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems
1150symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish
1151between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001152"filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: *g:filetype_csh*
1153>
1154 :let g:filetype_csh = "csh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001155
1156For using tcsh: >
1157
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001158 :let g:filetype_csh = "tcsh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001159
1160Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc,
1161tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001162will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001163"filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the
1164variable.
1165
1166
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001167CYNLIB *cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001168
1169Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001170hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001171or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001172normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001173line to your .vimrc file: >
1174
1175 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1
1176
1177Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) >
1178
1179 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1
1180
1181To disable these again, use this: >
1182
1183 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc
1184 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp
1185<
1186
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001187CWEB *cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001188
1189Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
1190doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
1191startup vimrc: >
1192 :let filetype_w = "cweb"
1193
1194
Bram Moolenaar96f45c02019-10-26 19:53:45 +02001195DART *dart.vim* *ft-dart-syntax*
1196
1197Dart is an object-oriented, typed, class defined, garbage collected language
1198used for developing mobile, desktop, web, and back-end applications. Dart uses
1199a C-like syntax derived from C, Java, and JavaScript, with features adopted
1200from Smalltalk, Python, Ruby, and others.
1201
1202More information about the language and its development environment at the
1203official Dart language website at https://dart.dev
1204
1205dart.vim syntax detects and highlights Dart statements, reserved words,
1206type declarations, storage classes, conditionals, loops, interpolated values,
1207and comments. There is no support idioms from Flutter or any other Dart
1208framework.
1209
1210Changes, fixes? Submit an issue or pull request via:
1211
1212https://github.com/pr3d4t0r/dart-vim-syntax/
1213
1214
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001215DESKTOP *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001216
1217Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files
Bram Moolenaara17d4c12010-05-30 18:30:36 +02001218according to freedesktop.org standard:
Bram Moolenaar65e0d772020-06-14 17:29:55 +02001219https://specifications.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/
1220To highlight nonstandard extensions that does not begin with X-, set >
1221 let g:desktop_enable_nonstd = 1
1222Note that this may cause wrong highlight.
1223To highlight KDE-reserved features, set >
1224 let g:desktop_enable_kde = 1
1225g:desktop_enable_kde follows g:desktop_enable_nonstd if not supplied
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001226
1227
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001228DIFF *diff.vim*
1229
1230The diff highlighting normally finds translated headers. This can be slow if
1231there are very long lines in the file. To disable translations: >
1232
1233 :let diff_translations = 0
1234
Bram Moolenaar0122c402015-02-03 19:13:34 +01001235Also see |diff-slow|.
1236
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001237
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001238DIRCOLORS *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001239
1240The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to
1241provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of
1242the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most
1243versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and
1244uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following
1245line to your startup file: >
1246 let dircolors_is_slackware = 1
1247
1248
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001249DOCBOOK *docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook*
Bram Moolenaar81af9252010-12-10 20:35:50 +01001250DOCBOOK XML *docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax*
1251DOCBOOK SGML *docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001252
1253There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you
1254are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you
1255automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type
1256defaults to XML.
1257You can set the type manually: >
1258 :let docbk_type = "sgml"
1259or: >
1260 :let docbk_type = "xml"
1261You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated.
1262Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": >
1263 :set filetype=docbksgml
1264or: >
1265 :set filetype=docbkxml
1266
Bram Moolenaar2df58b42012-11-28 18:21:11 +01001267You can specify the DocBook version: >
1268 :let docbk_ver = 3
1269When not set 4 is used.
1270
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001271
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001272DOSBATCH *dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001273
1274There is one option with highlighting DOS batch files. This covers new
1275extensions to the Command Interpreter introduced with Windows 2000 and
1276is controlled by the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For Windows NT
1277this should have the value 1, and for Windows 2000 it should be 2.
1278Select the version you want with the following line: >
1279
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001280 :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001281
1282If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support
1283Windows 2000.
1284
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001285A second option covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001286"dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter
1287is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: >
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001288
1289 :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1
1290
1291If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected.
1292
1293
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001294DOXYGEN *doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax*
1295
1296Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format
Bram Moolenaare37d50a2008-08-06 17:06:04 +00001297(similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp,
1298idl and php files, and should also work with java.
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001299
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001300There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done
1301explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file.
1302Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001303 :set syntax=c.doxygen
1304or >
1305 // vim:syntax=c.doxygen
1306
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01001307It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting
1308the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by
1309adding the following to your .vimrc. >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001310 :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1
1311
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001312There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, and
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001313are to do with non-standard highlighting options.
1314
1315Variable Default Effect ~
1316g:doxygen_enhanced_color
1317g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for
1318 doxygen comments.
1319
1320doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic
1321 and html_my_rendering underline.
1322
1323doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief
1324 colour highlighting.
1325
1326doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00001327 punctuation of brief
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001328
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02001329There are also some highlight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001330configuration.
1331
1332Highlight Effect ~
1333doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing
1334 punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section
1335doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the
1336 \endlink from a \link section.
1337
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001338
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001339DTD *dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001340
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001341The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001342case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1343
1344 :let dtd_ignore_case=1
1345
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001346The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001347this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: >
1348
1349 :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1
1350
1351before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file.
1352Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the
1353'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'.
1354Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant'
1355highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001356delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001357
1358 :let dtd_no_param_entities=1
1359
1360The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's.
1361
1362
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001363EIFFEL *eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001364
1365While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001366syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to
1367highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001368highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1369
1370 :let eiffel_ignore_case=1
1371
1372Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments.
1373
1374Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: >
1375
1376 :let eiffel_strict=1
1377 :let eiffel_pedantic=1
1378
1379Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the
1380five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and
1381"NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names.
1382
1383Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style
1384guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and
1385lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords).
1386
1387If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void",
1388"Result", and "Precursor", you can use >
1389
1390 :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1
1391
1392instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off.
1393
1394Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already
1395experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: >
1396
1397 :let eiffel_ise=1
1398
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001399Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001400
1401 :let eiffel_hex_constants=1
1402
1403to your startup file.
1404
1405
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001406EUPHORIA *euphoria3.vim* *euphoria4.vim* *ft-euphoria-syntax*
1407
Bram Moolenaar7ff78462020-07-10 22:00:53 +02001408Two syntax highlighting files exist for Euphoria. One for Euphoria
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001409version 3.1.1, which is the default syntax highlighting file, and one for
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001410Euphoria version 4.0.5 or later.
1411
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001412Euphoria version 3.1.1 (http://www.rapideuphoria.com/) is still necessary
1413for developing applications for the DOS platform, which Euphoria version 4
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001414(http://www.openeuphoria.org/) does not support.
1415
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001416The following file extensions are auto-detected as Euphoria file type:
1417
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001418 *.e, *.eu, *.ew, *.ex, *.exu, *.exw
1419 *.E, *.EU, *.EW, *.EX, *.EXU, *.EXW
1420
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001421To select syntax highlighting file for Euphoria, as well as for
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001422auto-detecting the *.e and *.E file extensions as Euphoria file type,
1423add the following line to your startup file: >
1424
Bram Moolenaar90df4b92021-07-07 20:26:08 +02001425 :let g:filetype_euphoria = "euphoria3"
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001426
Bram Moolenaar4d8f4762021-06-27 15:18:56 +02001427< or >
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001428
Bram Moolenaar90df4b92021-07-07 20:26:08 +02001429 :let g:filetype_euphoria = "euphoria4"
1430
1431Elixir and Euphoria share the *.ex file extension. If the filetype is
1432specifically set as Euphoria with the g:filetype_euphoria variable, or the
1433file is determined to be Euphoria based on keywords in the file, then the
1434filetype will be set as Euphoria. Otherwise, the filetype will default to
1435Elixir.
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001436
1437
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001438ERLANG *erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001439
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001440Erlang is a functional programming language developed by Ericsson. Files with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02001441the following extensions are recognized as Erlang files: erl, hrl, yaws.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001442
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001443The BIFs (built-in functions) are highlighted by default. To disable this,
1444put the following line in your vimrc: >
1445
1446 :let g:erlang_highlight_bifs = 0
1447
1448To enable highlighting some special atoms, put this in your vimrc: >
1449
1450 :let g:erlang_highlight_special_atoms = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001451
1452
Bram Moolenaar90df4b92021-07-07 20:26:08 +02001453ELIXIR *elixir.vim* *ft-elixir-syntax*
1454
1455Elixir is a dynamic, functional language for building scalable and maintainable
1456applications.
1457
1458The following file extensions are auto-detected as Elixir file types:
1459
1460 *.ex, *.exs, *.eex, *.leex, *.lock
1461
1462Elixir and Euphoria share the *.ex file extension. If the filetype is
1463specifically set as Euphoria with the g:filetype_euphoria variable, or the
1464file is determined to be Euphoria based on keywords in the file, then the
1465filetype will be set as Euphoria. Otherwise, the filetype will default to
1466Elixir.
1467
1468
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001469FLEXWIKI *flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax*
1470
1471FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com
Bram Moolenaar446beb42011-05-10 17:18:44 +02001472NOTE: this site currently doesn't work, on Wikipedia is mentioned that
1473development stopped in 2009.
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001474
1475Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki
1476syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make
1477editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the
1478start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length),
1479'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak'
1480(to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen),
1481and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default.
1482
1483If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys
1484move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: >
1485 :let flexwiki_maps = 1
1486
1487
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001488FORM *form.vim* *ft-form-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001489
1490The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default
1491modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String,
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00001492following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001493J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991.
1494
1495If you want include your own changes to the default colors, you have to
1496redefine the following syntax groups:
1497
1498 - formConditional
1499 - formNumber
1500 - formStatement
1501 - formHeaderStatement
1502 - formComment
1503 - formPreProc
1504 - formDirective
1505 - formType
1506 - formString
1507
1508Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and
1509directives per default in the same syntax group.
1510
1511A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001512header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001513this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file >
1514
1515 :let form_enhanced_color=1
1516
1517The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001518gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001519conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction.
1520
1521
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001522FORTRAN *fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001523
1524Default highlighting and dialect ~
Bram Moolenaar6ee8d892012-01-10 14:55:01 +01001525Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default. This choice
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001526should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is
1527almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001528
1529Fortran source code form ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001530Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001531syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set.
1532
1533When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001534form. If you always use free source form, then >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001535 :let fortran_free_source=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001536in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed source
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001537form, then >
1538 :let fortran_fixed_source=1
1539in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command.
1540
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001541If the form of the source code depends, in a non-standard way, upon the file
1542extension, then it is most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin
1543file. For more information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. Note that this
1544will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax
1545on" command in your .vimrc file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001546
1547When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free
1548source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001549fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001550neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001551determine which source form has been used by examining the file extension
1552using conventions common to the ifort, gfortran, Cray, NAG, and PathScale
1553compilers (.f, .for, .f77 for fixed-source, .f90, .f95, .f03, .f08 for
1554free-source). If none of this works, then the script examines the first five
1555columns of the first 500 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form
1556are detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The
1557algorithm should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a
1558file that begins with 500 or more full-line comments, the script may
1559incorrectly decide that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens,
1560just add a non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01001561of the first twenty-five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001562
1563Tabs in fortran files ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001564Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001565fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001566Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like
1567using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001568variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as >
1569 :let fortran_have_tabs=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001570placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001571mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins.
1572
1573Syntax folding of fortran files ~
1574If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable
1575fortran_fold with a command such as >
1576 :let fortran_fold=1
1577to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that
1578is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001579subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001580also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as >
1581 :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1
1582then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001583case constructs. If you also set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001584fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as >
1585 :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1
1586then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001587lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001588
1589If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or
1590fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001591you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001592units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program
1593unit.
1594
1595More precise fortran syntax ~
1596If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as >
1597 :let fortran_more_precise=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001598then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001599statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be
1600recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall
1601construct.
1602
1603Non-default fortran dialects ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001604The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably
1605find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory. A few legacy constructs
1606deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo
1607items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001608
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001609If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that
1610other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001611that free source form will be assumed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001612
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001613The dialect can be selected in various ways. If all your fortran files use
1614the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior
1615to your syntax on statement. The case-sensitive, permissible values of
1616fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are
1617ignored.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001618
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001619If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to
1620set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file. For more information on
1621ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your fortran files with
1622an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should
1623contain the code >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001624 let s:extfname = expand("%:e")
1625 if s:extfname ==? "f90"
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001626 let b:fortran_dialect="F"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001627 else
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001628 unlet! b:fortran_dialect
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001629 endif
1630Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command
1631precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file.
1632
1633Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001634the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis,
1635by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or
1636f08) in one of the first three lines in your file. For example, your older .f
1637files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would
1638identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a
1639Fortran comment of the form >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001640 ! fortran_dialect=F
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001641
1642For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the
1643now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be
1644silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F"
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001645instead.
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001646
1647The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to
1648comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some
1649non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted
1650or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001651items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001652
1653Limitations ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001654Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith
1655strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001656because Fortran90 has no reserved words.
1657
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001658For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and
1659|ft-fortran-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001660
1661
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001662FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES *fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001663
1664In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match
1665the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns
1666appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these
1667patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version
1668number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm.
1669
1670For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/
1671as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: >
1672
1673 :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 |
1674 \ set filetype=fvwm
1675
1676If you'd like Vim to highlight all valid color names, tell it where to
1677find the color database (rgb.txt) on your system. Do this by setting
1678"rgb_file" to its location. Assuming your color database is located
1679in /usr/X11/lib/X11/, you should add the line >
1680
1681 :let rgb_file = "/usr/X11/lib/X11/rgb.txt"
1682
1683to your .vimrc file.
1684
1685
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001686GSP *gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001687
1688The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by |html.vim|, and
1689the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks)
1690is defined by |java.vim|. The following HTML groups defined in |html.vim|
1691are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code:
1692
1693 htmlString
1694 htmlValue
1695 htmlEndTag
1696 htmlTag
1697 htmlTagN
1698
1699Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline
1700java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML
1701group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight
1702correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava
1703to the contains clause.
1704
1705The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError
1706group to make them easier to see.
1707
1708
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001709GROFF *groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001710
1711The groff syntax file is a wrapper for |nroff.vim|, see the notes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001712under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001713of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the
1714filetype from a |modeline| or in a personal filetype definitions file
1715(see |filetype.txt|).
1716
1717
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001718HASKELL *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001719
1720The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001721Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001722syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives.
1723
1724If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a
1725light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: >
1726 :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1
1727To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers,
1728add: >
1729 :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1
1730To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: >
1731 :let hs_highlight_types = 1
1732And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: >
1733 :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1
1734If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in
1735your .vimrc: >
1736 :let hs_highlight_debug = 1
1737
1738The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor
1739directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001740directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for
1741operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001742as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: >
1743 :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1
1744
1745The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to
1746automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains
1747TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001748or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001749in your .vimrc >
1750 :let lhs_markup = none
1751for no highlighting at all, or >
1752 :let lhs_markup = tex
1753to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup.
1754For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of
1755this variable, so e.g. >
1756 :let b:lhs_markup = tex
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001757will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001758set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or
1759loading a file.
1760
1761
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001762HTML *html.vim* *ft-html-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001763
1764The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows.
1765
1766The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
1767This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
Bram Moolenaarc8cdf0f2021-03-13 13:28:13 +01001768closing tags the 'Identifier' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those
1769are defined for you)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001770
1771Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
1772names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which
1773makes it easy to spot errors
1774
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001775Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001776names are colored differently than unknown ones.
1777
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001778Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001779are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
1780text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>,
1781while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001782only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001783<A href="somefile.html">).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001784
1785If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
1786following syntax groups:
1787
1788 - htmlBold
1789 - htmlBoldUnderline
1790 - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic
1791 - htmlUnderline
1792 - htmlUnderlineItalic
1793 - htmlItalic
1794 - htmlTitle for titles
1795 - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings
1796
1797To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception
1798of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the
1799following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
1800are read during initialization) >
1801 :let html_my_rendering=1
1802
1803If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at
1804http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html
1805
1806You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
1807vimrc file: >
1808 :let html_no_rendering=1
1809
1810HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the
1811details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors.
1812However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and
Bram Moolenaar8bb1c3e2014-07-04 16:43:17 +02001813ends with -->) you can define >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001814 :let html_wrong_comments=1
1815
1816JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as
1817'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001818programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are currently
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001819supported, no other scripting language has been added yet.
1820
1821Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too.
1822
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001823There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been
1824written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001825following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language
1826(the example comes from the asp.vim file):
Bram Moolenaar30e9b3c2019-09-07 16:24:12 +02001827>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001828 runtime! syntax/html.vim
1829 syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp
1830
1831Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain
1832the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc.
1833
1834
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001835HTML/OS (by Aestiva) *htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001836
1837The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows:
1838
1839Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM
1840doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change
1841this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a
1842different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: >
1843 :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray
1844
1845Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose.
1846
1847Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to
1848signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening
1849a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: >
1850 :set syntax=htmlos
1851
1852Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a
1853block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively.
1854
1855
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001856IA64 *ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001857
1858Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See |asm.vim| for
1859how to recognize this filetype.
1860
1861To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: >
1862 :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64"
1863
1864
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001865INFORM *inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001866
1867Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as
1868most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols
1869to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: >
1870 :let inform_highlight_simple=1
1871
1872By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted,
1873and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If
1874you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you
1875need to add this to your startup sequence: >
1876 :let inform_highlight_glulx=1
1877
1878This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the
1879set of highlighted system functions.
1880
1881The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when
1882it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors
1883by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your
1884startup sequence: >
1885 :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1
1886
1887By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler
1888version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older
1889Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your
1890startup sequence: >
1891 :let inform_highlight_old=1
1892
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001893IDL *idl.vim* *idl-syntax*
1894
1895IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In
1896Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls.
1897
1898IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to
1899rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001900repetitive but seems to work.
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001901
1902There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them
1903are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions.
1904
1905The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions.
1906
1907Variable Effect ~
1908
1909idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific
1910 extensions
1911idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions
1912idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but
1913 quite helpful)
1914idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors
1915
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001916
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001917JAVA *java.vim* *ft-java-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001918
1919The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options:
1920
1921In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was
1922flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001923classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001924way, put the following line into your vim startup file: >
1925 :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1
1926
1927All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To
1928highlight them use: >
1929 :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1
1930
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001931You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001932download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html.
1933If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io
1934use the following: >
1935 :let java_highlight_java_io=1
1936Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported.
1937
1938Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001939how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001940functions:
1941
1942If you write function declarations that are always indented by either
1943a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set >
1944 :let java_highlight_functions="indent"
1945However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are
1946supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use >
1947 :let java_highlight_functions="style"
1948If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function
1949declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the
1950definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the
1951original one and then adds the code to highlight functions.
1952
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001953In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00001954only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001955statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001956your startup file: >
1957 :let java_highlight_debug=1
1958The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001959characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001960new highlightings for the following groups.:
1961 Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType
1962which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001963strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I
Bram Moolenaar2547aa92020-07-26 17:00:44 +02001964have opted to choose another background for those statements.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001965
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001966Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and
1967creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code
1968similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|). You can even add Javascript
1969and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001970 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by
1971 some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change
1972 the color change the group CommentTitle).
1973 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'.
1974 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001975 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001976 and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function.
1977To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: >
1978 :let java_ignore_javadoc=1
1979
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001980If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you
1981can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic
1982scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you
1983actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded
1984CSS. The options to use are >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001985 :let java_javascript=1
1986 :let java_css=1
1987 :let java_vb=1
1988
1989In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors
1990for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with >
1991 :hi link javaParen Comment
1992or >
1993 :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff
1994
1995If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1996when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable
1997to a larger number: >
1998 :let java_minlines = 50
1999This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
2000displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
2001number is that redrawing can become slow.
2002
2003
Bram Moolenaar589edb32019-09-20 14:38:13 +02002004JSON *json.vim* *ft-json-syntax*
2005
2006The json syntax file provides syntax highlighting with conceal support by
2007default. To disable concealment: >
2008 let g:vim_json_conceal = 0
2009
2010To disable syntax highlighting of errors: >
2011 let g:vim_json_warnings = 0
2012
2013
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002014LACE *lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002015
2016Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the
2017style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just
2018define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: >
2019 :let lace_case_insensitive=1
2020
2021
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002022LEX *lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002023
2024Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter
2025gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for >
2026 :syn sync minlines=300
2027may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization
2028difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files).
2029
2030
Bram Moolenaar6fc45b52010-07-25 17:42:45 +02002031LIFELINES *lifelines.vim* *ft-lifelines-syntax*
2032
2033To highlight deprecated functions as errors, add in your .vimrc: >
2034
2035 :let g:lifelines_deprecated = 1
2036<
2037
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002038LISP *lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax*
2039
2040The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: >
2041
2042 g:lisp_instring : if it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted
2043 as if the contents of the string were lisp.
2044 Useful for AutoLisp.
2045 g:lisp_rainbow : if it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels
2046 of parenthesization will receive different
2047 highlighting.
2048<
2049The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for
2050the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of
2051colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode
2052specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02002053usual color scheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002054highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see |'bg'|).
2055
2056
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002057LITE *lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002058
2059There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting.
2060
2061If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2062
2063 :let lite_sql_query = 1
2064
2065For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2066set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2067
2068 :let lite_minlines = 200
2069
2070
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002071LPC *lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002072
Bram Moolenaard2f3a8b2018-06-19 14:35:59 +02002073LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensjö C. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002074file name of LPC is usually *.c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother
2075users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you
2076should set a variable in your .vimrc file: >
2077
2078 :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1
2079
2080If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a
2081modeline. For a LPC file:
2082
2083 // vim:set ft=lpc:
2084
2085For a C file that is recognized as LPC:
2086
2087 // vim:set ft=c:
2088
2089If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file.
2090
2091There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002092used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002093and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also
Bram Moolenaar7e38ea22014-04-05 22:55:53 +02002094assert the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002095you are using the latest version of MudOS: >
2096
2097 :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1
2098
2099For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: >
2100
2101 :let lpc_compat_32 = 1
2102
2103For LPC4 series of LPC: >
2104
2105 :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1
2106
2107For uLPC series of LPC:
2108uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax
2109instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike
2110
2111
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002112LUA *lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002113
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01002114The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002115the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables
2116lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +010021175.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this:
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002118
2119 :let lua_version = 5
2120 :let lua_subversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002121
2122
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002123MAIL *mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002124
2125Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures,
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002126quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002127signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by
2128whitespaces and end with a newline.
2129
2130Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002131as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002132only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space).
2133
2134By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002135displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002136with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: >
2137
2138 :let mail_minlines = 30
2139
2140
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002141MAKE *make.vim* *ft-make-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002142
2143In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot
2144errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this
2145feature off by using: >
2146
2147 :let make_no_commands = 1
2148
2149
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002150MAPLE *maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002151
2152Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language
2153supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user.
2154The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be
2155highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: >
2156
2157 :let mvpkg_all= 1
2158
2159to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by
2160choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to
21611, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing
2162$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim).
2163
2164 Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors >
2165 mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process
2166 mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex
2167 mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats
2168 mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student
2169 mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools
2170 mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor
2171 mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder
2172 mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries
2173
2174
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002175MATHEMATICA *mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar34cdc3e2005-05-18 22:24:46 +00002176
2177Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you
2178have the following in your .vimrc: >
2179
2180 let filetype_m = "mma"
2181
2182
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002183MOO *moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002184
2185If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your
2186highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style
2187comments: >
2188
2189 :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1
2190
2191To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: >
2192
2193 :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1
2194
2195To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching
2196'%(' and '%)' inside strings: >
2197
2198 :let moo_no_regexp = 1
2199
2200Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: >
2201
2202 :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1
2203
2204To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): >
2205
2206 :let moo_builtin_properties = 1
2207
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002208Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002209use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group.
2210To enable this option: >
2211
2212 :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1
2213
2214An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: >
2215
2216 :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained
2217
2218
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002219MSQL *msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002220
2221There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting.
2222
2223If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2224
2225 :let msql_sql_query = 1
2226
2227For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2228set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2229
2230 :let msql_minlines = 200
2231
2232
Bram Moolenaarc572da52017-08-27 16:52:01 +02002233N1QL *n1ql.vim* *ft-n1ql-syntax*
2234
2235N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in
2236Couchbase Server databases.
2237
2238Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments,
2239and special values. Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its
2240many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL.
2241
2242
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002243NCF *ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002244
2245There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting.
2246
2247If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as
2248errors, use this: >
2249
2250 :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1
2251
2252If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset.
2253
2254
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002255NROFF *nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002256
2257The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to
2258activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you
2259can use them.
2260
2261For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002262processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting
Bram Moolenaardad44732021-03-31 20:07:33 +02002263features for groff, arrange for files to be recognized as groff (see
2264|ft-groff-syntax|) or add the following option to your start-up files: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002265
Bram Moolenaardad44732021-03-31 20:07:33 +02002266 :let nroff_is_groff = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002267
2268Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in
2269Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and
2270there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002271you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002272can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's
2273native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly:
2274\[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm
2275accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim
2276environments.
2277
2278In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should
2279follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation.
2280
22811. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines.
2282
22832. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period,
2284 exclamation mark, etc.
2285
22863. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a
2287 carriage return.
2288
2289The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking
2290algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above.
2291
2292Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and,
2293furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and
2294vertical space input will be output as is.
2295
2296Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences
2297than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common
2298practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002299marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02002300need to maintain regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002301spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: >
2302
2303 :let nroff_space_errors = 1
2304
2305Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere
2306with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching
2307highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002308"nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002309
2310 hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse
2311 hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold
2312 \ gui=reverse,bold
2313
2314If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as
2315with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc
2316file: >
2317
2318 let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1
2319
Bram Moolenaar69a7cb42004-06-20 12:51:53 +00002320As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002321paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package.
2322
2323Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling
2324groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default.
2325
2326
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002327OCAML *ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002328
2329The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml,
2330.mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable >
2331
2332 :let ocaml_revised = 1
2333
2334you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported
2335by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable >
2336
2337 :let ocaml_noend_error = 1
2338
2339prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources
2340contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore.
2341
2342
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002343PAPP *papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002344
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01002345The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extent, .pxml
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002346and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002347as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml
2348sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002349you set the variable: >
2350
2351 :let papp_include_html=1
2352
2353in your startup file it will try to syntax-hilight html code inside phtml
2354sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002355edit sensibly. ;)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002356
2357The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at
2358http://papp.plan9.de.
2359
2360
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002361PASCAL *pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002362
Bram Moolenaar98a29d02021-01-18 19:55:44 +01002363Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal and those matching "*.pp"
2364could be Puppet or Pascal. If the automatic detection doesn't work for you,
2365or you only edit Pascal files, use this in your startup vimrc: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002366
Bram Moolenaar98a29d02021-01-18 19:55:44 +01002367 :let filetype_p = "pascal"
2368 :let filetype_pp = "pascal"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002369
2370The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions
2371provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002372Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002373enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the
2374following line to your startup file: >
2375
2376 :let pascal_traditional=1
2377
2378To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments,
2379keywords, etc): >
2380
2381 :let pascal_delphi=1
2382
2383
2384The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +,
2385*, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol
2386operators, add the following line to your startup file: >
2387
2388 :let pascal_symbol_operator=1
2389
2390Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: >
2391
2392 :let pascal_no_functions=1
2393
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02002394Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers. Besides
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002395pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to
2396match Turbo Pascal. >
2397
2398 :let pascal_gpc=1
2399
2400or >
2401
2402 :let pascal_fpc=1
2403
2404To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the
2405pascal_one_line_string variable. >
2406
2407 :let pascal_one_line_string=1
2408
2409If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs
2410will be highlighted as Error. >
2411
2412 :let pascal_no_tabs=1
2413
2414
2415
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002416PERL *perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002417
2418There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting.
2419
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002420Inline POD highlighting is now turned on by default. If you don't wish
2421to have the added complexity of highlighting POD embedded within Perl
2422files, you may set the 'perl_include_pod' option to 0: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002423
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002424 :let perl_include_pod = 0
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002425
Bram Moolenaar822ff862014-06-12 21:46:14 +02002426To reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002427off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002428
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002429To handle package references in variable and function names not differently
2430from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002431
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002432 :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002433
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002434(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables"
2435enabled it.)
2436
2437If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: >
2438
2439 :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1
2440
Bram Moolenaar3fdfa4a2004-10-07 21:02:47 +00002441(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002442
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002443The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will be
2444highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002445perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line.
2446
2447 "hello world!"; qq|hello world|;
2448 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement)
2449 S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement)
2450
2451(^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all)
2452
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002453The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002454synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly.
2455If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002456then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can figure
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002457out the line that causes the mistake.
2458
2459One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. >
2460
2461 :let perl_no_sync_on_sub
2462 :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var
2463
2464Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for
2465its attempts in syntax highlighting. >
2466
2467 :let perl_sync_dist = 100
2468
2469If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: >
2470
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002471 :let perl_fold = 1
2472
2473If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: >
2474
2475 :let perl_fold_blocks = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002476
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002477Subroutines are folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. If you do not want
2478this, you can set 'perl_nofold_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002479
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002480 :let perl_nofold_subs = 1
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002481
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002482Anonymous subroutines are not folded by default; you may enable their folding
2483via 'perl_fold_anonymous_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002484
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002485 :let perl_fold_anonymous_subs = 1
2486
2487Packages are also folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. To disable this
2488behavior, set 'perl_nofold_packages': >
2489
2490 :let perl_nofold_packages = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002491
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002492PHP3 and PHP4 *php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002493
2494[note: previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4
2495it has been renamed to "php"]
2496
2497There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting.
2498
2499If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: >
2500
2501 let php_sql_query = 1
2502
2503For highlighting the Baselib methods: >
2504
2505 let php_baselib = 1
2506
2507Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: >
2508
2509 let php_htmlInStrings = 1
2510
2511Using the old colorstyle: >
2512
2513 let php_oldStyle = 1
2514
2515Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: >
2516
2517 let php_asp_tags = 1
2518
2519Disable short tags: >
2520
2521 let php_noShortTags = 1
2522
2523For highlighting parent error ] or ): >
2524
2525 let php_parent_error_close = 1
2526
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02002527For skipping a php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002528one: >
2529
2530 let php_parent_error_open = 1
2531
2532Enable folding for classes and functions: >
2533
2534 let php_folding = 1
2535
2536Selecting syncing method: >
2537
2538 let php_sync_method = x
2539
2540x = -1 to sync by search (default),
2541x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards,
2542x = 0 to sync from start.
2543
2544
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002545PLAINTEX *plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax*
2546
2547TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain"
2548variant of TeX. If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00002549see |ft-tex-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002550
2551This syntax file has the option >
2552
2553 let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1
2554
2555if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}".
2556
2557
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002558PPWIZARD *ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002559
2560PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files
2561
2562This syntax file has the options:
2563
2564- ppwiz_highlight_defs : determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002565 definitions. Possible values are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002566
2567 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002568 colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002569
2570 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : preprocessor #define and #evaluate
2571 statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line
2572 continuation symbols
2573
2574 The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1.
2575
2576- ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal
2577 HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text.
2578
2579
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002580PHTML *phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002581
2582There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting.
2583
2584If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2585
2586 :let phtml_sql_query = 1
2587
2588For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2589set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2590
2591 :let phtml_minlines = 200
2592
2593
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002594POSTSCRIPT *postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002595
2596There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript.
2597
2598First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are
2599currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original
2600and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2.
2601Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of
2602extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest
2603level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want
2604highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: >
2605
2606 :let postscr_level=2
2607
2608If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is
2609the most prevalent version currently.
2610
2611Note, not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a
2612particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of
2613PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript!
2614
2615If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of
2616Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as
2617follows: >
2618
2619 :let postscr_display=1
2620
2621If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of
2622Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable
2623postscr_ghostscript as follows: >
2624
2625 :let postscr_ghostscript=1
2626
2627PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it
2628useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can
2629cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and
2630character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working
2631explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be
2632highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: >
2633
2634 :let postscr_fonts=1
2635 :let postscr_encodings=1
2636
2637There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In
2638PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their
2639operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators,
2640if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical
2641operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way
2642or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be
2643highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable
2644postscr_andornot_binary as follows: >
2645
2646 :let postscr_andornot_binary=1
2647<
2648
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002649 *ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax*
2650PRINTCAP + TERMCAP *ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002651
2652This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases.
2653
2654In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match
2655the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns
2656appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file. For these
2657patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or
2658"term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap.
2659
2660For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap
2661files, add the following: >
2662
2663 :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" |
2664 \ set filetype=ptcap
2665
2666If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which
2667are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines"
2668internal variable to a larger number: >
2669
2670 :let ptcap_minlines = 50
2671
2672(The default is 20 lines.)
2673
2674
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002675PROGRESS *progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002676
2677Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
2678doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your
2679startup vimrc: >
2680 :let filetype_w = "progress"
2681The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be
2682Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: >
2683 :let filetype_i = "progress"
2684 :let filetype_p = "progress"
2685
2686
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002687PYTHON *python.vim* *ft-python-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002688
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002689There are six options to control Python syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002690
2691For highlighted numbers: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002692 :let python_no_number_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002693
2694For highlighted builtin functions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002695 :let python_no_builtin_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002696
2697For highlighted standard exceptions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002698 :let python_no_exception_highlight = 1
2699
2700For highlighted doctests and code inside: >
2701 :let python_no_doctest_highlight = 1
2702or >
2703 :let python_no_doctest_code_highlight = 1
2704(first option implies second one).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002705
Bram Moolenaar4a748032010-09-30 21:47:56 +02002706For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002707 :let python_space_error_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002708
2709If you want all possible Python highlighting (the same as setting the
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002710preceding last option and unsetting all other ones): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002711 :let python_highlight_all = 1
2712
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002713Note: only existence of these options matter, not their value. You can replace
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002714 1 above with anything.
2715
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002716QUAKE *quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002717
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01002718The Quake syntax definition should work for most FPS (First Person Shooter)
2719based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary a bit
2720between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the syntax
2721definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow users
2722to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables can
2723be set for the following effects:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002724
2725set to highlight commands only available in Quake: >
2726 :let quake_is_quake1 = 1
2727
2728set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: >
2729 :let quake_is_quake2 = 1
2730
2731set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: >
2732 :let quake_is_quake3 = 1
2733
2734Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more
2735commands than are actually available to you by the game.
2736
2737
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02002738R *r.vim* *ft-r-syntax*
2739
2740The parsing of R code for syntax highlight starts 40 lines backwards, but you
2741can set a different value in your |vimrc|. Example: >
2742 let r_syntax_minlines = 60
2743
2744You can also turn off syntax highlighting of ROxygen: >
2745 let r_syntax_hl_roxygen = 0
2746
2747enable folding of code delimited by parentheses, square brackets and curly
2748braces: >
2749 let r_syntax_folding = 1
2750
2751and highlight as functions all keywords followed by an opening parenthesis: >
2752 let r_syntax_fun_pattern = 1
2753
2754
2755R MARKDOWN *rmd.vim* *ft-rmd-syntax*
2756
2757To disable syntax highlight of YAML header, add to your |vimrc|: >
2758 let rmd_syn_hl_yaml = 0
2759
2760To disable syntax highlighting of citation keys: >
2761 let rmd_syn_hl_citations = 0
2762
2763To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers: >
2764 let rmd_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2765
2766By default, chunks of R code will be highlighted following the rules of R
2767language. If you want proper syntax highlighting of chunks of other languages,
2768you should add them to either `markdown_fenced_languages` or
2769`rmd_fenced_languages`. For example to properly highlight both R and Python,
2770you may add this to your |vimrc|: >
2771 let rmd_fenced_languages = ['r', 'python']
2772
2773
2774R RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rrst.vim* *ft-rrst-syntax*
2775
2776To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers, add to your |vimrc|: >
2777 let rrst_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2778
2779
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002780READLINE *readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002781
2782The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002783few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002784items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the
2785command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: >
2786 let readline_has_bash = 1
2787
2788This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and
2789later, and part earlier) adds.
2790
2791
Bram Moolenaar95a9dd12019-12-19 22:12:03 +01002792REGO *rego.vim* *ft-rego-syntax*
2793
2794Rego is a query language developed by Styra. It is mostly used as a policy
2795language for kubernetes, but can be applied to almost anything. Files with
2796the following extensions are recognized as rego files: .rego.
2797
2798
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002799RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rst.vim* *ft-rst-syntax*
2800
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002801Syntax highlighting is enabled for code blocks within the document for a
2802select number of file types. See $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/rst.vim for the default
2803syntax list.
2804
2805To set a user-defined list of code block syntax highlighting: >
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002806 let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...]
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002807
2808To assign multiple code block types to a single syntax, define
2809`rst_syntax_code_list` as a mapping: >
2810 let rst_syntax_code_list = {
Bram Moolenaar0c0734d2019-11-26 21:44:46 +01002811 \ 'cpp': ['cpp', 'c++'],
2812 \ 'bash': ['bash', 'sh'],
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002813 ...
Bram Moolenaar0c0734d2019-11-26 21:44:46 +01002814 \ }
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002815
2816To use color highlighting for emphasis text: >
2817 let rst_use_emphasis_colors = 1
2818
2819To enable folding of sections: >
2820 let rst_fold_enabled = 1
2821
2822Note that folding can cause performance issues on some platforms.
2823
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002824
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002825REXX *rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002826
2827If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
2828when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable
2829to a larger number: >
2830 :let rexx_minlines = 50
2831This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
2832displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
2833number is that redrawing can become slow.
2834
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02002835Vim tries to guess what type a ".r" file is. If it can't be detected (from
2836comment lines), the default is "r". To make the default rexx add this line to
2837your .vimrc: *g:filetype_r*
2838>
2839 :let g:filetype_r = "r"
2840
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002841
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002842RUBY *ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002843
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002844 Ruby: Operator highlighting |ruby_operators|
2845 Ruby: Whitespace errors |ruby_space_errors|
2846 Ruby: Folding |ruby_fold| |ruby_foldable_groups|
2847 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations |ruby_no_expensive| |ruby_minlines|
2848 Ruby: Spellchecking strings |ruby_spellcheck_strings|
2849
2850 *ruby_operators*
2851 Ruby: Operator highlighting ~
2852
2853Operators can be highlighted by defining "ruby_operators": >
2854
2855 :let ruby_operators = 1
2856<
2857 *ruby_space_errors*
2858 Ruby: Whitespace errors ~
2859
2860Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": >
2861
2862 :let ruby_space_errors = 1
2863<
2864This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character
2865as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and
2866"ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after
2867spaces respectively.
2868
2869 *ruby_fold* *ruby_foldable_groups*
2870 Ruby: Folding ~
2871
2872Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": >
2873
2874 :let ruby_fold = 1
2875<
2876This will set the value of 'foldmethod' to "syntax" locally to the current
2877buffer or window, which will enable syntax-based folding when editing Ruby
2878filetypes.
2879
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002880Default folding is rather detailed, i.e., small syntax units like "if", "do",
2881"%w[]" may create corresponding fold levels.
2882
2883You can set "ruby_foldable_groups" to restrict which groups are foldable: >
2884
2885 :let ruby_foldable_groups = 'if case %'
2886<
2887The value is a space-separated list of keywords:
2888
2889 keyword meaning ~
2890 -------- ------------------------------------- ~
2891 ALL Most block syntax (default)
2892 NONE Nothing
2893 if "if" or "unless" block
2894 def "def" block
2895 class "class" block
2896 module "module" block
2897 do "do" block
2898 begin "begin" block
2899 case "case" block
2900 for "for", "while", "until" loops
2901 { Curly bracket block or hash literal
2902 [ Array literal
2903 % Literal with "%" notation, e.g.: %w(STRING), %!STRING!
2904 / Regexp
2905 string String and shell command output (surrounded by ', ", `)
2906 : Symbol
2907 # Multiline comment
2908 << Here documents
2909 __END__ Source code after "__END__" directive
2910
2911 *ruby_no_expensive*
2912 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002913
2914By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002915of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002916experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support)
2917you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002918
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002919 :let ruby_no_expensive = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002920<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002921In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords.
2922
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002923 *ruby_minlines*
2924
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002925If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while
2926scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting
2927the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002928
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002929 :let ruby_minlines = 100
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002930<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002931Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your
2932largest class or module.
2933
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002934 *ruby_spellcheck_strings*
2935 Ruby: Spellchecking strings ~
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002936
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002937Ruby syntax will perform spellchecking of strings if you define
2938"ruby_spellcheck_strings": >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002939
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002940 :let ruby_spellcheck_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002941<
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00002942
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002943SCHEME *scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002944
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002945By default only R7RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002946
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002947scheme.vim also supports extensions of the CHICKEN Scheme->C compiler.
2948Define b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002949
2950
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002951SDL *sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002952
2953The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many
2954of them it's almost impossibly to cope.
2955
2956The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are
2957case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002958used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002959highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: >
2960 :let sdl_2000=1
2961
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002962This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002963keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: >
2964 :let SDL_no_96=1
2965
2966
2967The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very
2968satisfied with it for my own projects.
2969
2970
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002971SED *sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002972
2973To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo
2974highlighting on the tabs), define "highlight_sedtabs" by putting >
2975
2976 :let highlight_sedtabs = 1
2977
2978in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs
2979inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included
2980by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is
2981also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that,
2982you can easily count the number of tabs in a string.
2983
2984Bugs:
2985
2986 The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute
2987 command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned,
2988 transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong.
2989 (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the
2990 involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for
2991 each plausible pattern delimiter).
2992
2993
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002994SGML *sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002995
2996The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows.
2997
2998The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
2999This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
3000closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
3001defined for you)
3002
3003Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
3004names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors.
3005
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003006Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003007names are colored differently than unknown ones.
3008
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003009Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003010are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
3011text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal>
3012<replaceable> <ulink> and <link>.
3013
3014If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
3015following syntax groups:
3016
3017 - sgmlBold
3018 - sgmlBoldItalic
3019 - sgmlUnderline
3020 - sgmlItalic
3021 - sgmlLink for links
3022
3023To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the
3024following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
3025are read during initialization) >
3026 let sgml_my_rendering=1
3027
3028You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
3029vimrc file: >
3030 let sgml_no_rendering=1
3031
3032(Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>)
3033
3034
Bram Moolenaar4466ad62020-11-21 13:16:30 +01003035 *ft-posix-syntax* *ft-dash-syntax*
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003036SH *sh.vim* *ft-sh-syntax* *ft-bash-syntax* *ft-ksh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003037
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003038This covers syntax highlighting for the older Unix (Bourne) sh, and newer
3039shells such as bash, dash, posix, and the Korn shells.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003040
3041Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003042various filenames are of specific types, e.g.: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003043
3044 ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh
3045 bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash
3046<
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003047See $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim for the full list of patterns. If none of these
3048cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined (ex. looking for
3049/bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, then
3050that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to be
3051shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems sh is
3052symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003053
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003054One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003055variables in your <.vimrc>:
3056
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003057 ksh: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003058 let g:is_kornshell = 1
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01003059< posix: (using this is nearly the same as setting g:is_kornshell to 1) >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003060 let g:is_posix = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003061< bash: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003062 let g:is_bash = 1
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003063< sh: (default) Bourne shell >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003064 let g:is_sh = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003065
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003066< (dash users should use posix)
3067
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003068If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a
3069default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003070the Bourne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration
3071statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003072sh your system uses and install the associated "let..." in your <.vimrc>.
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003073
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003074The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: >
3075
3076 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0 (default, no syntax folding)
3077 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 (enable function folding)
3078 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2 (enable heredoc folding)
3079 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4 (enable if/do/for folding)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003080>
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003081then various syntax items (ie. HereDocuments and function bodies) become
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003082syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|). You also may add these together
3083to get multiple types of folding: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003084
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003085 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3 (enables function and heredoc folding)
3086
3087If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed
3088when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003089to a larger number. Example: >
3090
3091 let sh_minlines = 500
3092
3093This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first
3094displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger
3095number is that redrawing can become slow.
3096
3097If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To
3098reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: >
3099
3100 let sh_maxlines = 100
3101<
3102The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to
3103speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear.
3104
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003105syntax/sh.vim tries to flag certain problems as errors; usually things like
3106extra ']'s, 'done's, 'fi's, etc. If you find the error handling problematic
3107for your purposes, you may suppress such error highlighting by putting
3108the following line in your .vimrc: >
3109
3110 let g:sh_no_error= 1
3111<
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003112
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003113 *sh-embed* *sh-awk*
3114 Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003115
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003116You may wish to embed languages into sh. I'll give an example courtesy of
3117Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following
3118file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: >
3119
Bram Moolenaardae8d212016-02-27 22:40:16 +01003120 " AWK Embedding:
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003121 " ==============
3122 " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope.
3123 if exists("b:current_syntax")
3124 unlet b:current_syntax
3125 endif
3126 syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim
3127 syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained
3128 syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode
3129 syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded
3130 hi def link AWKCommand Type
3131<
3132This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: >
3133 awk '...awk code here...'
3134be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax. Clearly this may be
3135extended to other languages.
3136
3137
3138SPEEDUP *spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax*
3139(AspenTech plant simulator)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003140
3141The Speedup syntax file has some options:
3142
3143- strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for
3144 sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not
3145 other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section).
3146
3147- highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types
3148 like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003149 plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003150 the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include
3151 them in the syntax file.
3152
3153- oneline_comments : this value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the
3154 highlighting of # style comments.
3155
3156 oneline_comments = 1 : allow normal Speedup code after an even
3157 number of #s.
3158
3159 oneline_comments = 2 : show code starting with the second # as
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003160 error. This is the default setting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003161
3162 oneline_comments = 3 : show the whole line as error if it contains
3163 more than one #.
3164
3165Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003166PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003167fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of
3168the syntax file.
3169
3170
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003171SQL *sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax*
3172 *sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003173 *sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003174
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003175While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own
3176custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of
3177SQL. Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003178
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003179Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax
3180scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL
3181supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a
3182buffer by buffer basis.
3183
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003184For more detailed instructions see |ft_sql.txt|.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003185
3186
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003187TCSH *tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003188
3189This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See |csh.vim|
3190for how the filetype is detected.
3191
3192Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003193is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist add
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003194this line to your .vimrc: >
3195
3196 :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0
3197
3198If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
3199when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable
3200to a larger number: >
3201
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003202 :let tcsh_minlines = 1000
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003203
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003204This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first
3205displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then
3206synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for
3207tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that
3208redrawing can become slow.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003209
3210
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003211TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* *latex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003212 *syntax-tex* *syntax-latex*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003213
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003214 Tex Contents~
3215 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? |tex-folding|
3216 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted |g:tex_nospell|
3217 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? |tex-nospell|
3218 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones? |tex-verb|
3219 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones |tex-runon|
3220 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? |tex-slow|
3221 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? |tex-morecommands|
3222 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? |tex-error|
3223 Tex: Need a new Math Group? |tex-math|
3224 Tex: Starting a New Style? |tex-style|
3225 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode |tex-conceal|
3226 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode |g:tex_conceal|
3227 Tex: Controlling iskeyword |g:tex_isk|
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003228 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control |tex-supersub|
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003229 Tex: Match Check Control |tex-matchcheck|
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003230
3231 *tex-folding* *g:tex_fold_enabled*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003232 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? ~
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003233
3234As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters,
3235sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put >
3236 let g:tex_fold_enabled=1
3237in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a
3238modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: >
3239 % vim: fdm=syntax
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003240If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into >
Bram Moolenaar6c1e1572019-06-22 02:13:00 +02003241 https://vimhelp.org/vim_faq.txt.html#faq-29.7
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003242<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003243 *g:tex_nospell*
3244 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted~
3245
3246If you don't want spell checking anywhere in your LaTeX document, put >
3247 let g:tex_nospell=1
3248into your .vimrc. If you merely wish to suppress spell checking inside
3249comments only, see |g:tex_comment_nospell|.
3250
3251 *tex-nospell* *g:tex_comment_nospell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003252 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003253
3254Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would
3255prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files. To do
3256this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3257 let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003258If you want to suppress spell checking everywhere inside your LaTeX document,
3259see |g:tex_nospell|.
3260
3261 *tex-verb* *g:tex_verbspell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003262 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~
Bram Moolenaar74cbdf02010-08-04 23:03:17 +02003263
3264Often verbatim regions are used for things like source code; seldom does
3265one want source code spell-checked. However, for those of you who do
3266want your verbatim zones spell-checked, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3267 let g:tex_verbspell= 1
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003268<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003269 *tex-runon* *tex-stopzone*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003270 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003271
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003272The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The
3273highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and
3274texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones
3275terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized
3276as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003277special "TeX comment" has been provided >
3278 %stopzone
3279which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a
3280texMathZone.
3281
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003282 *tex-slow* *tex-sync*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003283 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003284
3285If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for >
3286 :syn sync maxlines=200
3287 :syn sync minlines=50
3288(especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003289increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003290if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?).
3291
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003292Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see
3293|tex-folding| for a way around this.
3294
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003295 *g:tex_fast*
3296
3297Finally, if syntax highlighting is still too slow, you may set >
3298
3299 :let g:tex_fast= ""
3300
3301in your .vimrc. Used this way, the g:tex_fast variable causes the syntax
3302highlighting script to avoid defining any regions and associated
3303synchronization. The result will be much faster syntax highlighting; the
3304price: you will no longer have as much highlighting or any syntax-based
3305folding, and you will be missing syntax-based error checking.
3306
3307You may decide that some syntax is acceptable; you may use the following table
3308selectively to enable just some syntax highlighting: >
3309
3310 b : allow bold and italic syntax
3311 c : allow texComment syntax
3312 m : allow texMatcher syntax (ie. {...} and [...])
3313 M : allow texMath syntax
3314 p : allow parts, chapter, section, etc syntax
3315 r : allow texRefZone syntax (nocite, bibliography, label, pageref, eqref)
3316 s : allow superscript/subscript regions
3317 S : allow texStyle syntax
3318 v : allow verbatim syntax
3319 V : allow texNewEnv and texNewCmd syntax
3320<
3321As an example, let g:tex_fast= "M" will allow math-associated highlighting
3322but suppress all the other region-based syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003323(also see: |g:tex_conceal| and |tex-supersub|)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003324
3325 *tex-morecommands* *tex-package*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003326 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003327
3328LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full
3329of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a
3330package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support
3331it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the
3332techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided
Bram Moolenaarb6b046b2011-12-30 13:11:27 +01003333by syntax/tex.vim. Please consider uploading any extensions that you write,
3334which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to
3335http://vim.sf.net/.
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003336
Bram Moolenaar93a1df22018-09-10 11:51:50 +02003337I've included some support for various popular packages on my website: >
3338
3339 http://www.drchip.org/astronaut/vim/index.html#LATEXPKGS
3340<
3341The syntax files there go into your .../after/syntax/tex/ directory.
3342
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003343 *tex-error* *g:tex_no_error*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003344 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003345
3346The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus,
3347although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate
3348errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you,
3349you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: >
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003350 let g:tex_no_error=1
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003351and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003352
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003353 *tex-math*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003354 Tex: Need a new Math Group? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003355
3356If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following
3357code shows you an example as to how you might do so: >
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003358 call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform)
3359You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix
3360(currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself).
3361As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: >
3362 call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1)
3363You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group,
3364and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim.
3365The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group
3366has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003367
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003368 *tex-style* *b:tex_stylish*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003369 Tex: Starting a New Style? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003370
3371One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in
3372commands available. However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the
3373following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag
3374such use of @ as an error. To solve this: >
3375
3376 :let b:tex_stylish = 1
3377 :set ft=tex
3378
3379Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim>
3380always accept such use of @.
3381
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003382 *tex-cchar* *tex-cole* *tex-conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003383 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode~
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003384
Bram Moolenaar477db062010-07-28 18:17:41 +02003385If you have |'conceallevel'| set to 2 and if your encoding is utf-8, then a
3386number of character sequences can be translated into appropriate utf-8 glyphs,
3387including various accented characters, Greek characters in MathZones, and
3388superscripts and subscripts in MathZones. Not all characters can be made into
3389superscripts or subscripts; the constraint is due to what utf-8 supports.
3390In fact, only a few characters are supported as subscripts.
3391
3392One way to use this is to have vertically split windows (see |CTRL-W_v|); one
3393with |'conceallevel'| at 0 and the other at 2; and both using |'scrollbind'|.
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003394
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003395 *g:tex_conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003396 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode~
3397
3398You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003399<.vimrc>. By default, g:tex_conceal is set to "admgs" to enable concealment
3400for the following sets of characters: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003401
3402 a = accents/ligatures
Bram Moolenaard38b0552012-04-25 19:07:41 +02003403 b = bold and italic
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003404 d = delimiters
3405 m = math symbols
3406 g = Greek
3407 s = superscripts/subscripts
3408<
3409By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character
3410substitution will not be made.
3411
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003412 *g:tex_isk* *g:tex_stylish*
3413 Tex: Controlling iskeyword~
3414
3415Normally, LaTeX keywords support 0-9, a-z, A-z, and 192-255 only. Latex
3416keywords don't support the underscore - except when in *.sty files. The
3417syntax highlighting script handles this with the following logic:
3418
3419 * If g:tex_stylish exists and is 1
3420 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3421 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003422 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003423 * Else if the file's suffix is sty, cls, clo, dtx, or ltx,
3424 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3425 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003426 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003427
3428 * If g:tex_isk exists, then it will be used for the local 'iskeyword'
3429 * Else the local 'iskeyword' will be set to 48-57,a-z,A-Z,192-255
3430
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003431 *tex-supersub* *g:tex_superscripts* *g:tex_subscripts*
3432 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control~
3433
3434 See |tex-conceal| for how to enable concealed character replacement.
3435
3436 See |g:tex_conceal| for selectively concealing accents, bold/italic,
3437 math, Greek, and superscripts/subscripts.
3438
3439 One may exert fine control over which superscripts and subscripts one
3440 wants syntax-based concealment for (see |:syn-cchar|). Since not all
3441 fonts support all characters, one may override the
3442 concealed-replacement lists; by default these lists are given by: >
3443
3444 let g:tex_superscripts= "[0-9a-zA-W.,:;+-<>/()=]"
3445 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aehijklmnoprstuvx,+-/().]"
3446<
3447 For example, I use Luxi Mono Bold; it doesn't support subscript
3448 characters for "hklmnpst", so I put >
3449 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aeijoruvx,+-/().]"
3450< in ~/.vim/ftplugin/tex/tex.vim in order to avoid having inscrutable
3451 utf-8 glyphs appear.
3452
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003453 *tex-matchcheck* *g:tex_matchcheck*
3454 Tex: Match Check Control~
3455
3456 Sometimes one actually wants mismatched parentheses, square braces,
Bram Moolenaar2346a632021-06-13 19:02:49 +02003457 and or curly braces; for example, \text{(1,10]} is a range from but
3458 not including 1 to and including 10. This wish, of course, conflicts
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003459 with the desire to provide delimiter mismatch detection. To
3460 accommodate these conflicting goals, syntax/tex.vim provides >
3461 g:tex_matchcheck = '[({[]'
3462< which is shown along with its default setting. So, if one doesn't
3463 want [] and () to be checked for mismatches, try using >
3464 let g:tex_matchcheck= '[{}]'
3465< If you don't want matching to occur inside bold and italicized
3466 regions, >
3467 let g:tex_excludematcher= 1
3468< will prevent the texMatcher group from being included in those regions.
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003469
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003470TF *tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003471
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003472There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting.
3473
3474For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
3475set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
3476
3477 :let tf_minlines = your choice
3478<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003479VIM *vim.vim* *ft-vim-syntax*
3480 *g:vimsyn_minlines* *g:vimsyn_maxlines*
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02003481There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003482updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the
3483g:vimsyn_minlines variable. The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to
3484improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003485
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003486 g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines
3487 g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines
3488<
3489 (g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of
3490 these two options)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003491
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003492 *g:vimsyn_embed*
3493The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of
3494embedded script highlighting they wish to have. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003495
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003496 g:vimsyn_embed == 0 : don't support any embedded scripts
3497 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'l' : support embedded lua
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003498 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : support embedded mzscheme
3499 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : support embedded perl
3500 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : support embedded python
3501 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : support embedded ruby
3502 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : support embedded tcl
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003503<
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003504By default, g:vimsyn_embed is a string supporting interpreters that your vim
3505itself supports. Concatenate multiple characters to support multiple types
3506of embedded interpreters; ie. g:vimsyn_embed= "mp" supports embedded mzscheme
3507and embedded perl.
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003508 *g:vimsyn_folding*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003509
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003510Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003511
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003512 g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding
3513 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups
3514 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003515 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'l' : fold lua script
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003516 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script
3517 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl script
3518 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python script
3519 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby script
3520 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl script
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +02003521<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003522 *g:vimsyn_noerror*
Bram Moolenaarb544f3c2017-02-23 19:03:28 +01003523Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; Vim script
3524is a difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003525highlighting is to put the following line in your |vimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003526
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003527 let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1
3528<
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003529
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003530
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003531XF86CONFIG *xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003532
3533The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both
3534variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect.
3535You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable
3536xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in
3537your .vimrc. Example: >
3538 :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3
3539When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable.
3540
3541Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use
3542"SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name
3543highlighted.
3544
3545
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003546XML *xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003547
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003548Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003549setting a global variable: >
3550
3551 :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1
3552<
3553 *xml-folding*
3554The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003555start and end tags. This can be turned on by >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003556
3557 :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1
3558 :set foldmethod=syntax
3559
3560Note: syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly,
3561especially for large files.
3562
3563
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003564X Pixmaps (XPM) *xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003565
3566xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the
3567XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings,
3568you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm".
3569
3570To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it
3571somewhere else with "P".
3572
3573Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: >
3574 :function! GetPixel()
Bram Moolenaar61660ea2006-04-07 21:40:07 +00003575 : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003576 : echo c
3577 : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r".c
3578 : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r".c
3579 :endfunction
3580 :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR>
3581 :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor
3582This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen.
3583It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you
3584must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it.
3585
3586It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: >
3587 :set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-*
3588
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003589
3590YAML *yaml.vim* *ft-yaml-syntax*
3591
3592 *g:yaml_schema* *b:yaml_schema*
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003593A YAML schema is a combination of a set of tags and a mechanism for resolving
3594non-specific tags. For user this means that YAML parser may, depending on
3595plain scalar contents, treat plain scalar (which can actually be only string
3596and nothing else) as a value of the other type: null, boolean, floating-point,
3597integer. `g:yaml_schema` option determines according to which schema values
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003598will be highlighted specially. Supported schemas are
3599
3600Schema Description ~
3601failsafe No additional highlighting.
3602json Supports JSON-style numbers, booleans and null.
3603core Supports more number, boolean and null styles.
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003604pyyaml In addition to core schema supports highlighting timestamps,
3605 but there are some differences in what is recognized as
3606 numbers and many additional boolean values not present in core
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003607 schema.
3608
3609Default schema is `core`.
3610
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003611Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the
3612only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003613difference defined in the syntax file.
3614
Bram Moolenaarf3913272016-02-25 00:00:01 +01003615
3616ZSH *zsh.vim* *ft-zsh-syntax*
3617
3618The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: >
3619
3620 :let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1
3621
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003622==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010036236. Defining a syntax *:syn-define* *E410*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003624
3625Vim understands three types of syntax items:
3626
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000036271. Keyword
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003628 It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword'
3629 option. It cannot contain other syntax items. It will only match with a
3630 complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match).
3631 The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because
3632 "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is.
3633
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000036342. Match
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003635 This is a match with a single regexp pattern.
3636
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000036373. Region
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003638 This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match
3639 with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A
3640 "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern.
3641
3642Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group
3643you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item
3644to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment,
3645and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a
3646"Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make
3647one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group.
3648This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting
3649each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting
3650for a lot of groups.
3651
3652Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight
3653group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used
3654for the syntax group with the same name.
3655
3656In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was
3657defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by
3658using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a
3659match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a
3660keyword with ignoring case.
3661
3662
3663PRIORITY *:syn-priority*
3664
3665When several syntax items may match, these rules are used:
3666
36671. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item
3668 defined last has priority.
36692. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items.
36703. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that
3671 start in later positions.
3672
3673
3674DEFINING CASE *:syn-case* *E390*
3675
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003676:sy[ntax] case [match | ignore]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003677 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with
3678 matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using
3679 "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all
3680 items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected.
3681
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003682:sy[ntax] case
3683 Show either "syntax case match" or "syntax case ignore" (translated).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003684
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02003685
3686DEFINING FOLDLEVEL *:syn-foldlevel*
3687
3688:sy[ntax] foldlevel [start | minimum]
3689 This defines how the foldlevel of a line is computed when using
3690 foldmethod=syntax (see |fold-syntax| and |:syn-fold|):
3691
3692 start: Use level of item containing start of line.
3693 minimum: Use lowest local-minimum level of items on line.
3694
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003695 The default is "start". Use "minimum" to search a line horizontally
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02003696 for the lowest level contained on the line that is followed by a
3697 higher level. This produces more natural folds when syntax items
3698 may close and open horizontally within a line.
3699
3700:sy[ntax] foldlevel
3701 Show either "syntax foldlevel start" or "syntax foldlevel minimum".
3702
3703 {not meaningful when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
3704
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003705SPELL CHECKING *:syn-spell*
3706
3707:sy[ntax] spell [toplevel | notoplevel | default]
3708 This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not
3709 in a syntax item:
3710
3711 toplevel: Text is spell checked.
3712 notoplevel: Text is not spell checked.
3713 default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking.
3714
3715 For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters
3716 |spell-syntax|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then
3717 spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel".
3718
3719 To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set.
3720
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003721:sy[ntax] spell
3722 Show either "syntax spell toplevel", "syntax spell notoplevel" or
3723 "syntax spell default" (translated).
3724
3725
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003726SYNTAX ISKEYWORD SETTING *:syn-iskeyword*
3727
3728:sy[ntax] iskeyword [clear | {option}]
3729 This defines the keyword characters. It's like the 'iskeyword' option
3730 for but only applies to syntax highlighting.
3731
3732 clear: Syntax specific iskeyword setting is disabled and the
3733 buffer-local 'iskeyword' setting is used.
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003734 {option} Set the syntax 'iskeyword' option to a new value.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003735
3736 Example: >
3737 :syntax iskeyword @,48-57,192-255,$,_
3738<
3739 This would set the syntax specific iskeyword option to include all
3740 alphabetic characters, plus the numeric characters, all accented
3741 characters and also includes the "_" and the "$".
3742
3743 If no argument is given, the current value will be output.
3744
3745 Setting this option influences what |/\k| matches in syntax patterns
Bram Moolenaar298b4402016-01-28 22:38:53 +01003746 and also determines where |:syn-keyword| will be checked for a new
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003747 match.
3748
Bram Moolenaard0796902016-09-16 20:02:31 +02003749 It is recommended when writing syntax files, to use this command to
3750 set the correct value for the specific syntax language and not change
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003751 the 'iskeyword' option.
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003752
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003753DEFINING KEYWORDS *:syn-keyword*
3754
3755:sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}]
3756
3757 This defines a number of keywords.
3758
3759 {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment".
3760 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3761 {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group.
3762
3763 Example: >
3764 :syntax keyword Type int long char
3765<
3766 The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to
3767 all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword.
3768 These examples do exactly the same: >
3769 :syntax keyword Type contained int long char
3770 :syntax keyword Type int long contained char
3771 :syntax keyword Type int long char contained
Bram Moolenaar88774fd2015-08-25 19:52:04 +02003772< *E789* *E890*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003773 When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in
3774 Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the
3775 variations at once: >
3776 :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext]
3777<
3778 Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the
3779 characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character
3780 isn't, the keyword will never be recognized.
3781 Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in
3782 'iskeyword'.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003783 See |:syn-iskeyword| for defining syntax specific iskeyword settings.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003784
3785 A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the
3786 keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest
3787 and a keyword can't contain anything else.
3788
3789 Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even
3790 one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match
3791 instead.
3792
3793 The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters.
3794
3795 The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment
3796 differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained
3797 and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003798 highlight group. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003799 :syn keyword vimCommand tag
3800 :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag
3801< When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand"
3802 highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that
3803 contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used.
3804
3805
3806DEFINING MATCHES *:syn-match*
3807
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003808:sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}]
3809 [excludenl]
3810 [keepend]
3811 {pattern}
3812 [{options}]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003813
3814 This defines one match.
3815
3816 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3817 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3818 [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3819 extend a containing match or region. Must be
3820 given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003821 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3822 match with the end pattern. See
3823 |:syn-keepend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003824 {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match.
3825 See |:syn-pattern| below.
3826 Note that the pattern may match more than one
3827 line, which makes the match depend on where
3828 Vim starts searching for the pattern. You
3829 need to make sure syncing takes care of this.
3830
3831 Example (match a character constant): >
3832 :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1
3833<
3834
3835DEFINING REGIONS *:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end*
3836 *E398* *E399*
3837:sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}]
3838 [matchgroup={group-name}]
3839 [keepend]
3840 [extend]
3841 [excludenl]
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003842 start={start-pattern} ..
3843 [skip={skip-pattern}]
3844 end={end-pattern} ..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003845 [{options}]
3846
3847 This defines one region. It may span several lines.
3848
3849 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3850 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3851 [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following
3852 start or end pattern matches only. Not used
3853 for the text in between the matched start and
3854 end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using
3855 a different group for the start or end match.
3856 See |:syn-matchgroup|.
3857 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3858 match with the end pattern. See
3859 |:syn-keepend|.
3860 extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003861 is contained in. See |:syn-extend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003862 excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3863 extend a containing match or item. Only
3864 useful for end patterns. Must be given before
3865 the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003866 start={start-pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003867 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003868 skip={skip-pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003869 the region where not to look for the end
3870 pattern. See |:syn-pattern| below.
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003871 end={end-pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003872 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3873
3874 Example: >
3875 :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3876<
3877 The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order.
3878 There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more
3879 start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip
3880 pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It
3881 is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign
3882 (although it mostly looks better without white space).
3883
3884 When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these
3885 is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start
3886 patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for
3887 the end patterns.
3888
3889 The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern.
3890 Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the
3891 end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern.
3892
3893 The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the
3894 search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what
3895 you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in
3896 the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble.
3897
3898 Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start
3899 pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT
3900 work: >
3901 :syn region First start="(" end=":"
3902 :syn region Second start="(" end=";"
3903< The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has
3904 higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next
3905 ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: >
3906 :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:"
3907 :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};"
3908< This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and
3909 repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible).
3910
3911 *:syn-keepend*
3912 By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern.
3913 This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with
3914 "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}"
3915 will then end the contained region, but not the outer region:
3916 { starts outer "{}" region
3917 { starts contained "{}" region
3918 } ends contained "{}" region
3919 } ends outer "{} region
3920 If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching
3921 of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item.
3922 This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for
3923 contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing
3924 that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: >
3925 :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+
3926 :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend
3927< The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line,
3928 even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>.
3929
3930 When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried
3931 after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first
3932 encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any
3933 contained matches.
3934 *:syn-extend*
3935 The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument.
3936 When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses
3937 "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be
3938 extended.
3939 This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while
3940 others don't. Example: >
3941
3942 :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript
3943 :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained
3944 :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend
3945
3946< Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue
3947 further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript
3948 item does extend the htmlRef item.
3949
3950 Another example: >
3951 :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend
3952< This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be
3953 changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to
3954 highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it
3955 includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested
3956 region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in.
3957
3958 *:syn-excludenl*
3959 When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$'
3960 to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is
3961 contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with
3962 "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue
3963 that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default
3964 behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it:
3965 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all
3966 contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be
3967 used when all contained items must not extend the containing item.
3968 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match
3969 from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if
3970 only some contained items must not extend the containing item.
3971 "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to.
3972
3973 *:syn-matchgroup*
3974 "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern
3975 differently than the body of the region. Example: >
3976 :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3977< This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in
3978 between with the "String" group.
3979 The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow,
3980 until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not
3981 using a matchgroup.
3982
3983 In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the
3984 contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid
3985 that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When
3986 using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern
3987 match that is highlighted with "matchgroup".
3988
3989 Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in
3990 different colors: >
3991 :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2
3992 :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained
3993 :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained
3994 :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red
3995 :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue
3996 :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02003997<
3998 *E849*
3999The maximum number of syntax groups is 19999.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004000
4001==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010040027. :syntax arguments *:syn-arguments*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004003
4004The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments.
4005The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order
4006and may be mixed with patterns.
4007
4008Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments
4009can not be used for all commands:
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +02004010 *E395*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004011 contains oneline fold display extend concealends~
4012:syntax keyword - - - - - -
4013:syntax match yes - yes yes yes -
4014:syntax region yes yes yes yes yes yes
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004015
4016These arguments can be used for all three commands:
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004017 conceal
4018 cchar
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004019 contained
4020 containedin
4021 nextgroup
4022 transparent
4023 skipwhite
4024 skipnl
4025 skipempty
4026
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004027conceal *conceal* *:syn-conceal*
4028
4029When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable.
Bram Moolenaar370df582010-06-22 05:16:38 +02004030Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the
Bram Moolenaarf5963f72010-07-23 22:10:27 +02004031'conceallevel' option. The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether
4032concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to
4033edit the line.
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02004034Another way to conceal text is with |matchadd()|.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004035
4036concealends *:syn-concealends*
4037
4038When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of
4039the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable.
4040Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the
4041'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately
4042in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup"
4043
4044cchar *:syn-cchar*
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01004045 *E844*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004046The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item
4047when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal
4048argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01004049character defined in the 'listchars' option is used. The character cannot be
4050a control character such as Tab. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004051 :syntax match Entity "&amp;" conceal cchar=&
Bram Moolenaar9028b102010-07-11 16:58:51 +02004052See |hl-Conceal| for highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004053
4054contained *:syn-contained*
4055
4056When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at
4057the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of
4058another match. Example: >
4059 :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained
4060 :syntax match Comment "//.*" contains=Todo
4061
4062
4063display *:syn-display*
4064
4065If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the
4066detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting,
4067by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is
4068to be displayed.
4069
4070Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these
4071conditions:
4072- The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region
4073 for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next
4074 line.
4075- The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or
4076 make it continue on the next line.
4077- The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example
4078 for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display",
4079 because it may make that preprocessor match shorter.
4080- The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise,
4081 and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a
4082 "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would
4083 match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line.
4084
4085Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used:
4086- match with a number
4087- match with a label
4088
4089
4090transparent *:syn-transparent*
4091
4092If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted
4093itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This
4094is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used
4095only to skip over a part of the text.
4096
4097The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in,
4098unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To
4099avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which
4100highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": >
4101 :syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim
4102 :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained
4103 :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE
4104 :hi link myString String
4105 :hi link myWord Comment
4106Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last
4107match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent"
4108argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But
4109it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left
4110out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow
Bram Moolenaar2346a632021-06-13 19:02:49 +02004111"myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Comment. This
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004112happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same
4113position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here.
4114
4115When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained
4116items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you
4117see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look
4118through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture:
4119
4120 look from here
4121
4122 | | | | | |
4123 V V V V V V
4124
4125 xxxx yyy more contained items
4126 .................... contained item (transparent)
4127 ============================= first item
4128
4129The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a
4130transparent group.
4131
4132What you see is:
4133
4134 =======xxxx=======yyy========
4135
4136Thus you look through the transparent "....".
4137
4138
4139oneline *:syn-oneline*
4140
4141The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line
4142boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the
4143region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on
4144the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line
4145continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first
4146line, otherwise the region doesn't even start.
4147
4148When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end
4149pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The
4150end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument
4151means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must
4152be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a
4153line break.
4154
4155
4156fold *:syn-fold*
4157
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004158The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004159Example: >
4160 :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold
4161 :syn sync fromstart
4162 :set foldmethod=syntax
4163This will make each {} block form one fold.
4164
4165The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item
4166ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold.
4167The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds.
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02004168See |:syn-foldlevel| to control how the foldlevel of a line is computed
4169from its syntax items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004170{not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
4171
4172
4173 *:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409*
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004174contains={group-name},..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004175
4176The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These
4177groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the
4178containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and
4179regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in
4180this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used
4181here.
4182
4183contains=ALL
4184 If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all
4185 groups will be accepted inside the item.
4186
4187contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},..
4188 If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all
4189 groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that
4190 are listed. Example: >
4191 :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function
4192
4193contains=TOP
4194 If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all
4195 groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained"
4196 argument.
4197contains=TOP,{group-name},..
4198 Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed.
4199
4200contains=CONTAINED
4201 If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then
4202 all groups will be accepted that have the "contained"
4203 argument.
4204contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},..
4205 Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are
4206 listed.
4207
4208
4209The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names
4210that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used).
4211The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: >
4212 ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3]
4213The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups
4214that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax
4215command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting
4216syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because
4217the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the
4218group names.
4219
4220The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a
4221region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used
4222|:syn-matchgroup|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the
4223region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the
4224area that is highlighted
4225
4226
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004227containedin={group-name}... *:syn-containedin*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004228
4229The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The
4230item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the
4231containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item.
4232
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004233The {group-name}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004234
4235This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to
4236be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition
4237of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading
4238the C syntax: >
4239 :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained
4240Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top
4241level.
4242
4243Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can
4244appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that
4245keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't
4246work.
4247
4248
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004249nextgroup={group-name},.. *:syn-nextgroup*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004250
4251The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names,
4252separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns).
4253
4254If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be
4255tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have
4256a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group
4257will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the
4258current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all
4259other groups. Example: >
4260 :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo
4261 :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller
4262 :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained
4263
4264This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a
4265"Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for
4266highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. >
4267
4268 Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf
4269 fff bbb fff bbb
4270
4271Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar.
4272when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be
4273highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match
4274would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|).
4275
4276
4277skipwhite *:syn-skipwhite*
4278skipnl *:syn-skipnl*
4279skipempty *:syn-skipempty*
4280
4281These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be
4282used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text:
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00004283 skipwhite skip over space and tab characters
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004284 skipnl skip over the end of a line
4285 skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl")
4286
4287When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no
4288next group that matches the white space.
4289
4290When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next
4291line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current
4292line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after
4293the current item in the same line.
4294
4295When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other
4296groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried
4297for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white
4298space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items.
4299
4300Example: >
4301 :syn match ifstart "\<if.*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty
4302 :syn match ifline "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained
4303 :syn match ifline "endif" contained
4304Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also
4305match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes
4306precedence.
4307Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add
4308"contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the
4309example).
4310
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004311IMPLICIT CONCEAL *:syn-conceal-implicit*
4312
4313:sy[ntax] conceal [on|off]
4314 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords,
4315 matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal
4316 on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region"
4317 defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal
4318 off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be
4319 given explicitly.
4320
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01004321:sy[ntax] conceal
4322 Show either "syntax conceal on" or "syntax conceal off" (translated).
4323
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004324==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010043258. Syntax patterns *:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004326
4327In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical
4328characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to
4329use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can
4330use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: >
4331 :syntax region Comment start="/\*" end="\*/"
4332 :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+
4333
4334See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004335always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004336value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is
4337not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and
4338independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings.
4339
4340Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*".
4341This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere.
4342
4343 *:syn-pattern-offset*
4344The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to
4345change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the
4346match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both
4347are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip
4348pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern.
4349
4350The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}"
4351The {what} can be one of seven strings:
4352
4353ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text
4354me Match End offset for the end of the matched text
4355hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts
4356he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends
4357rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts
4358re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends
4359lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern
4360
4361The {offset} can be:
4362
4363s start of the matched pattern
4364s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4365s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
4366e end of the matched pattern
4367e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4368e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
Bram Moolenaarac7bd632013-03-19 11:35:58 +01004369{nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars right of the start
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004370
4371Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3".
4372
4373Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always
4374meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used:
4375
4376 ms me hs he rs re lc ~
4377match item yes yes yes yes - - yes
4378region item start yes - yes - yes - yes
4379region item skip - yes - - - - yes
4380region item end - yes - yes - yes yes
4381
4382Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: >
4383 :syn match String /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1
4384<
4385 some "string" text
4386 ^^^^^^ highlighted
4387
4388Notes:
4389- There must be no white space between the pattern and the character
4390 offset(s).
4391- The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text.
4392- A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end
4393 pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped.
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004394- Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters.
Bram Moolenaar207f0092020-08-30 17:20:20 +02004395 This didn't work well for multibyte characters, so it was changed with the
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004396 Vim 7.2 release.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004397- The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern
4398 matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting
4399 start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e.
4400
4401Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): >
4402 :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1
4403<
4404 /* this is a comment */
4405 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted
4406
4407A more complicated Example: >
4408 :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1
4409<
4410 abcfoostringbarabc
4411 mmmmmmmmmmm match
Bram Moolenaar4770d092006-01-12 23:22:24 +00004412 sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar")
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004413
4414Leading context *:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context*
4415
4416Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility
4417with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct
4418in the pattern.
4419
4420The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must
4421be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will
4422cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing
4423characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be
4424used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to
4425specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: >
4426
4427 :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1
4428 :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1
4429 :syn match Underline "_\+"
4430<
4431 ___zzzz ___wwww
4432 ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline
4433 ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash
4434 ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash
4435
4436The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset,
4437unless you set "ms" explicitly.
4438
4439
4440Multi-line patterns *:syn-multi-line*
4441
4442The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as
4443expected, but there are a few exceptions.
4444
4445When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not
4446allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004447following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of
4448the match doesn't move to another line.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004449
4450The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will
4451continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is
4452matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line
4453halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a
4454previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern
4455is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: >
4456 x x a
4457 b x x
4458Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters
4459after the "\n".
4460
4461
4462External matches *:syn-ext-match*
4463
4464These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns:
4465
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02004466 */\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* *E879*
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01004467 \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it can be
4468 accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable in
4469 defining a syntax region start pattern.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004470
4471 */\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5*
4472 \z1 ... \z9 */\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67*
4473 Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding
4474 sub-expression in a previous start pattern match.
4475
4476Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common
4477sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix
4478shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression
4479items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be
4480referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document
4481example, for instance, can be done like this: >
4482 :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$"
4483
4484As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern,
4485it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01004486changes the \z1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004487first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can
4488also be used in skip patterns: >
4489 :syn region foo start="start \(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1"
4490
4491Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and
4492indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied
4493to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa".
4494Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references
4495within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one
4496sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest
4497the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)".
4498
4499Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches
4500cannot be referred to.
4501
4502==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010045039. Syntax clusters *:syn-cluster* *E400*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004504
4505:sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..]
4506 [add={group-name}..]
4507 [remove={group-name}..]
4508
4509This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a
4510single name.
4511
4512 contains={group-name}..
4513 The cluster is set to the specified list of groups.
4514 add={group-name}..
4515 The specified groups are added to the cluster.
4516 remove={group-name}..
4517 The specified groups are removed from the cluster.
4518
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004519A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=..,
4520nextgroup=.., add=.. or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use
4521this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004522
4523Example: >
4524 :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers
4525 :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2
4526
4527As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively
4528retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so
4529to speak: >
4530 :syntax keyword A aaa
4531 :syntax keyword B bbb
4532 :syntax cluster AandB contains=A
4533 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB
4534 :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff
4535
4536This also has implications for nested clusters: >
4537 :syntax keyword A aaa
4538 :syntax keyword B bbb
4539 :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B
4540 :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup
4541 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup
4542 :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup
4543 :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004544<
4545 *E848*
4546The maximum number of clusters is 9767.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004547
4548==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100454910. Including syntax files *:syn-include* *E397*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004550
4551It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for
4552a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in
4553two different ways:
4554
4555 - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4556 allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use
4557 the |:runtime| command: >
4558
4559 " In cpp.vim:
4560 :runtime! syntax/c.vim
4561 :unlet b:current_syntax
4562
4563< - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4564 contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the
4565 ":syntax include" command:
4566
4567:sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name}
4568
4569 All syntax items declared in the included file will have the
4570 "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified,
4571 all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to
4572 that list. >
4573
4574 " In perl.vim:
4575 :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim
4576 :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod
4577<
4578 When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR"
4579 or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path
4580 (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'.
4581 All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is
4582 recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file
Bram Moolenaareab6dff2020-03-01 19:06:45 +01004583 with their own version, without replacing the file that does the
4584 ":syn include".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004585
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004586 *E847*
4587The maximum number of includes is 999.
4588
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004589==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100459011. Synchronizing *:syn-sync* *E403* *E404*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004591
4592Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To
4593make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where
4594redrawing starts.
4595
4596:sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...]
4597
4598There are four ways to synchronize:
45991. Always parse from the start of the file.
4600 |:syn-sync-first|
46012. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can
4602 figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment.
4603 |:syn-sync-second|
46043. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there.
4605 |:syn-sync-third|
46064. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on.
4607 |:syn-sync-fourth|
4608
4609 *:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines*
4610For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is
4611limited by "minlines" and "maxlines".
4612
4613If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least
4614that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few
4615lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing.
4616
4617If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched
4618for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after
4619adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a
4620slow machine. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +01004621 :syntax sync maxlines=500 ccomment
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004622<
4623 *:syn-sync-linebreaks*
4624When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may
4625cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to
4626start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with
4627the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line
4628break use this: >
4629 :syntax sync linebreaks=1
4630The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a
4631change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the
4632value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks".
4633
4634
4635First syncing method: *:syn-sync-first*
4636>
4637 :syntax sync fromstart
4638
4639The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting
4640accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text,
4641so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However,
Bram Moolenaarf1568ec2011-12-14 21:17:39 +01004642when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004643case: to the end of the file).
4644
4645Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number.
4646
4647
4648Second syncing method: *:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment*
4649
4650For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given.
4651Example: >
4652 :syntax sync ccomment
4653
4654When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style
4655comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be
4656used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"!
4657An alternate group name can be specified, for example: >
4658 :syntax sync ccomment javaComment
4659This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be
4660used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that
4661region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/".
4662
4663The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of
4664lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of
4665lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few
4666lines, but it hard to sync on).
4667
4668Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used
4669that cross a line and contain a "*/". Since letting strings cross a line
4670is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the
4671chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction
4672is hardly ever noticed.
4673
4674
4675Third syncing method: *:syn-sync-third*
4676
4677For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given.
4678Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This
4679means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower.
4680Example: >
4681 :syntax sync minlines=50
4682
4683"lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions).
4684
4685
4686Fourth syncing method: *:syn-sync-fourth*
4687
4688The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a
4689sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some
4690region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search
4691starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there
4692the search continues backwards in the file.
4693
4694This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained
4695matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences:
4696- Keywords cannot be used.
4697- The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group
4698 of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups.
4699- The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of
4700 forwards.
4701- A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group
4702 of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the
4703 search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the
Bram Moolenaarc8cdf0f2021-03-13 13:28:13 +01004704 consecutive lines that contain the continuation pattern.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004705- When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or
4706 group of continued lines).
4707- When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of
4708 continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the
4709 line (or group of continued lines).
4710- When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of
4711 continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used.
4712 This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region
4713 (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used).
4714
4715There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used:
47161. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the
4717 search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected
4718 to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions
4719 that cross lines cannot contain other regions.
47202. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group
4721 that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified.
4722 This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much
4723 slower, because more text needs to be parsed.
4724Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time.
4725
4726Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to
4727avoid finding unwanted matches.
4728
4729[The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the
4730search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the
4731highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much)
4732faster.]
4733
4734 *syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394*
4735 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4736
4737 Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the
4738 name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing
4739 of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region
4740 must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used.
4741 "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match.
4742
4743 *syn-sync-groupthere*
4744 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4745
4746 Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that
4747 is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync
4748 point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync
4749 pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting.
4750 For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/". If
4751 "/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the
4752 "groupthere" is "cComment". If "*/" is found first, you know that you
4753 are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice
4754 it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear
4755 inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...).
4756
4757 :syntax sync match ..
4758 :syntax sync region ..
4759
4760 Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is
4761 skipped while searching for a sync point.
4762
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004763 *syn-sync-linecont*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004764 :syntax sync linecont {pattern}
4765
4766 When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in
4767 the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will
4768 consider the lines to be concatenated.
4769
4770If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are
4771searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very
4772few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: >
4773 :syntax sync maxlines=100
4774
4775You can clear all sync settings with: >
4776 :syntax sync clear
4777
4778You can clear specific sync patterns with: >
4779 :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} ..
4780
4781==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100478212. Listing syntax items *:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004783
Bram Moolenaar482aaeb2005-09-29 18:26:07 +00004784This command lists all the syntax items: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004785
4786 :sy[ntax] [list]
4787
4788To show the syntax items for one syntax group: >
4789
4790 :sy[ntax] list {group-name}
4791
Bram Moolenaar24ea3ba2010-09-19 19:01:21 +02004792To list the syntax groups in one cluster: *E392* >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004793
4794 :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name}
4795
4796See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command.
4797
4798Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn"
4799is mostly used, because it looks better.
4800
4801==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100480213. Highlight command *:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004803
4804There are three types of highlight groups:
4805- The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the
4806 name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are
4807 linked to a group of the second type.
4808- The ones used for all syntax languages.
4809- The ones used for the 'highlight' option.
4810 *hitest.vim*
4811You can see all the groups currently active with this command: >
4812 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim
4813This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed
4814in their own color.
4815
4816 *:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185*
Bram Moolenaar00a927d2010-05-14 23:24:24 +02004817:colo[rscheme] Output the name of the currently active color scheme.
4818 This is basically the same as >
4819 :echo g:colors_name
4820< In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will
4821 output "default". When compiled without the |+eval|
4822 feature it will output "unknown".
4823
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004824:colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath'
Bram Moolenaarbc488a72013-07-05 21:01:22 +02004825 for the file "colors/{name}.vim". The first one that
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004826 is found is loaded.
Bram Moolenaare18c0b32016-03-20 21:08:34 +01004827 Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below
4828 "start" and then under "opt".
4829
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004830 Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004831 ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004832
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004833 To customize a color scheme use another name, e.g.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004834 "~/.vim/colors/mine.vim", and use `:runtime` to load
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004835 the original color scheme: >
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004836 runtime colors/evening.vim
4837 hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue
4838
Bram Moolenaar15142e22018-04-30 22:19:58 +02004839< Before the color scheme will be loaded the
4840 |ColorSchemePre| autocommand event is triggered.
4841 After the color scheme has been loaded the
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00004842 |ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004843 For info about writing a color scheme file: >
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00004844 :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004845
4846:hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have
4847 attributes set.
4848
4849:hi[ghlight] {group-name}
4850 List one highlight group.
4851
Yegappan Lakshmanand1a8d652021-11-03 21:56:45 +00004852 *highlight-clear*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004853:hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all
4854 highlighting for groups added by the user!
4855 Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which
4856 default colors to use.
Bram Moolenaar213da552020-09-17 19:59:26 +02004857 If there was a default link, restore it. |:hi-link|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004858
4859:hi[ghlight] clear {group-name}
4860:hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE
4861 Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It
4862 is _not_ set back to the default colors.
4863
4864:hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} ..
4865 Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for
4866 an existing group.
4867 See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments.
4868 See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default]
4869 argument.
4870
4871Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the
4872default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional
4873highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default
4874values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to
4875the default value.
4876
4877A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command. This loads
4878a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: >
4879
4880 :hi Comment gui=bold
4881
4882Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the
4883specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the
4884result is like this single command has been used: >
4885 :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold
4886<
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004887 *:highlight-verbose*
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004888When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will
4889also tell where it was last set. Example: >
4890 :verbose hi Comment
4891< Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004892 Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004893
Bram Moolenaar8aff23a2005-08-19 20:40:30 +00004894When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be
4895mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004896
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004897 *highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423*
4898There are three types of terminals for highlighting:
4899term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm)
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +01004900cterm a color terminal (MS-Windows console, color-xterm, these have the "Co"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004901 termcap entry)
4902gui the GUI
4903
4904For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use
4905the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting.
4906
49071. highlight arguments for normal terminals
4908
Bram Moolenaar75c50c42005-06-04 22:06:24 +00004909 *bold* *underline* *undercurl*
4910 *inverse* *italic* *standout*
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004911 *nocombine* *strikethrough*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004912term={attr-list} *attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418*
4913 attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the
4914 following items (in any order):
4915 bold
4916 underline
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004917 undercurl not always available
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004918 strikethrough not always available
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004919 reverse
4920 inverse same as reverse
4921 italic
4922 standout
Bram Moolenaar0cd2a942017-08-12 15:12:30 +02004923 nocombine override attributes instead of combining them
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004924 NONE no attributes used (used to reset it)
4925
4926 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
4927 have the same effect.
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004928 "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004929 then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough"
Bram Moolenaaracc22402020-06-07 21:07:18 +02004930 are only available in the GUI and some terminals. The color is set
4931 with |highlight-guisp| or |highlight-ctermul|. You can try these
4932 termcap entries to make undercurl work in a terminal: >
4933 let &t_Cs = "\e[4:3m"
4934 let &t_Ce = "\e[4:0m"
4935
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004936
4937start={term-list} *highlight-start* *E422*
4938stop={term-list} *term-list* *highlight-stop*
4939 These lists of terminal codes can be used to get
4940 non-standard attributes on a terminal.
4941
4942 The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument
4943 is written before the characters in the highlighted
4944 area. It can be anything that you want to send to the
4945 terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence
4946 specified with the "stop" argument is written after the
4947 highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument.
4948 Otherwise the screen will look messed up.
4949
4950 The {term-list} can have two forms:
4951
4952 1. A string with escape sequences.
4953 This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with
4954 "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized
4955 here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example:
4956 start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r;
4957
4958 2. A list of terminal codes.
4959 Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of
4960 the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas.
4961 White space is not allowed. Example:
4962 start=t_C1,t_BL
4963 The terminal codes must exist for this to work.
4964
4965
49662. highlight arguments for color terminals
4967
4968cterm={attr-list} *highlight-cterm*
4969 See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|.
4970 The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when
4971 colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could
4972 be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue.
Bram Moolenaar68e65602019-05-26 21:33:31 +02004973 Note: Some terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes
4974 with coloring. To be portable, use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg="
4975 OR "ctermbg=".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004976
4977ctermfg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermfg* *E421*
4978ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg*
Bram Moolenaare023e882020-05-31 16:42:30 +02004979ctermul={color-nr} *highlight-ctermul*
4980 These give the foreground (ctermfg), background (ctermbg) and
4981 underline (ctermul) color to use in the terminal.
4982
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004983 The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to
4984 (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co".
4985 The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal
4986 and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of
4987 "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives
4988 another color, on others you just get color 3.
4989
4990 For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit
4991 unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The
4992 colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file.
4993 Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors
4994 for each user. See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms.
Bram Moolenaard2ea7cf2021-05-30 20:54:13 +02004995 *tmux*
4996 When using tmux you may want to use this in the tmux config: >
4997 # tmux colors
Bram Moolenaar2346a632021-06-13 19:02:49 +02004998 set -s default-terminal "tmux-256color"
4999 set -as terminal-overrides ",*-256color:Tc"
Bram Moolenaard2ea7cf2021-05-30 20:54:13 +02005000< More info at:
5001 https://github.com/tmux/tmux/wiki/FAQ#how-do-i-use-a-256-colour-terminal
5002 https://github.com/tmux/tmux/wiki/FAQ#how-do-i-use-rgb-colour
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005003
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +01005004 The MS-Windows standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so
5005 these have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in
5006 X11 are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005007 highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The
5008 following names are recognized, with the color number used:
5009
5010 *cterm-colors*
5011 NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~
5012 0 0 Black
5013 1 4 DarkBlue
5014 2 2 DarkGreen
5015 3 6 DarkCyan
5016 4 1 DarkRed
5017 5 5 DarkMagenta
5018 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow
5019 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey
5020 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey
5021 9 4* Blue, LightBlue
5022 10 2* Green, LightGreen
5023 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan
5024 12 1* Red, LightRed
5025 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta
5026 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow
5027 15 7* White
5028
5029 The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co'
5030 greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for
5031 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '*' indicates that the
5032 bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g.,
5033 "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work
5034 for background colors! Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed.
5035 If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a
5036 "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use
5037 a number instead of a color name.
5038
5039 The case of the color names is ignored.
5040 Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005041 numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '*' means 'add 8' so that Blue
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005042 is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc.
5043
5044 Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong
5045 colors!
5046
Bram Moolenaar5837f1f2015-03-21 18:06:14 +01005047 You can also use "NONE" to remove the color.
5048
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005049 *:hi-normal-cterm*
5050 When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group,
5051 these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text.
5052 Example: >
5053 :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue
5054< When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the
Bram Moolenaar6aa8cea2017-06-05 14:44:35 +02005055 'background' option will be adjusted automatically, under the
5056 condition that the color is recognized and 'background' was not set
5057 explicitly. This causes the highlight groups that depend on
5058 'background' to change! This means you should set the colors for
5059 Normal first, before setting other colors.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02005060 When a color scheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005061 be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01005062 delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005063
5064 When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim
5065 needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op"
5066 termcap entry |t_op|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the
5067 't_op' option in your .vimrc.
Bram Moolenaare023e882020-05-31 16:42:30 +02005068 *E419* *E420* *E453*
5069 When Vim knows the normal foreground, background and underline colors,
5070 "fg", "bg" and "ul" can be used as color names. This only works after
5071 setting the colors for the Normal group and for the MS-Windows
5072 console. Example, for reverse video: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005073 :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg
5074< Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this
Bram Moolenaar75e15672020-06-28 13:10:22 +02005075 command is given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005076 "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted.
5077
5078
50793. highlight arguments for the GUI
5080
5081gui={attr-list} *highlight-gui*
5082 These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode.
5083 See |attr-list| for a description.
5084 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
5085 have the same effect.
5086 Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group.
5087
5088font={font-name} *highlight-font*
5089 font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim
5090 runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: >
5091 font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1
5092<
5093 The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font.
5094 When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default
5095 font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is
5096 used).
5097 The following only works with Motif and Athena, not with other GUIs:
5098 When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed.
5099 When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be
5100 changed.
5101 All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same
5102 character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will
5103 occur.
Bram Moolenaar82af8712016-06-04 20:20:29 +02005104 To use a font name with an embedded space or other special character,
5105 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5106 Example: >
5107 :hi comment font='Monospace 10'
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005108
5109guifg={color-name} *highlight-guifg*
5110guibg={color-name} *highlight-guibg*
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005111guisp={color-name} *highlight-guisp*
5112 These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02005113 (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl and
5114 strikethrough.
Bram Moolenaar7df351e2006-01-23 22:30:28 +00005115 There are a few special names:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005116 NONE no color (transparent)
5117 bg use normal background color
5118 background use normal background color
5119 fg use normal foreground color
5120 foreground use normal foreground color
5121 To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character,
5122 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5123 Example: >
5124 :hi comment guifg='salmon pink'
5125<
5126 *gui-colors*
5127 Suggested color names (these are available on most systems):
5128 Red LightRed DarkRed
5129 Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen
5130 Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue
5131 Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan
5132 Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta
5133 Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow
5134 Gray LightGray DarkGray
5135 Black White
5136 Orange Purple Violet
5137
5138 In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See
5139 |win32-colors|.
5140
5141 You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values.
5142 The format is "#rrggbb", where
5143 "rr" is the Red value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005144 "gg" is the Green value
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005145 "bb" is the Blue value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005146 All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: >
Drew Vogele30d1022021-10-24 20:35:07 +01005147 :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005148<
Drew Vogele30d1022021-10-24 20:35:07 +01005149 If you are authoring a color scheme and use the same hexademical value
5150 repeatedly, you can define a name for it in |v:colornames|. For
5151 example: >
5152
5153 # provide a default value for this color but allow the user to
5154 # override it.
5155 :call extend(v:colornames, {'alt_turquoise': '#11f0c3'}, 'keep')
5156 :highlight Comment guifg=alt_turquoise guibg=magenta
5157<
5158 If you are using a color scheme that relies on named colors and you
5159 would like to adjust the precise appearance of those colors, you can
5160 do so by overriding the values in |v:colornames| prior to loading the
5161 scheme: >
5162
5163 let v:colornames['alt_turquoise'] = '#22f0d3'
5164 colorscheme alt
5165<
5166 If you want to develop a color list that can be relied on by others,
5167 it is best to prefix your color names. By convention these color lists
5168 are placed in the colors/lists directory. You can see an example in
5169 '$VIMRUNTIME/colors/lists/csscolors.vim'. This list would be sourced
5170 by a color scheme using: >
5171
5172 :runtime colors/lists/csscolors.vim
5173 :highlight Comment guifg=css_turquoise
5174<
5175
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005176 *highlight-groups* *highlight-default*
5177These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the
5178'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value
5179of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight"
5180command.
Bram Moolenaar1a384422010-07-14 19:53:30 +02005181 *hl-ColorColumn*
5182ColorColumn used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn'
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005183 *hl-Conceal*
5184Conceal placeholder characters substituted for concealed
5185 text (see 'conceallevel')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005186 *hl-Cursor*
5187Cursor the character under the cursor
Bram Moolenaarf90b6e02019-05-09 19:26:38 +02005188lCursor the character under the cursor when |language-mapping|
5189 is used (see 'guicursor')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005190 *hl-CursorIM*
5191CursorIM like Cursor, but used when in IME mode |CursorIM|
Bram Moolenaar5316eee2006-03-12 22:11:10 +00005192 *hl-CursorColumn*
5193CursorColumn the screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is
5194 set
5195 *hl-CursorLine*
5196CursorLine the screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is
5197 set
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005198 *hl-Directory*
5199Directory directory names (and other special names in listings)
5200 *hl-DiffAdd*
5201DiffAdd diff mode: Added line |diff.txt|
5202 *hl-DiffChange*
5203DiffChange diff mode: Changed line |diff.txt|
5204 *hl-DiffDelete*
5205DiffDelete diff mode: Deleted line |diff.txt|
5206 *hl-DiffText*
5207DiffText diff mode: Changed text within a changed line |diff.txt|
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02005208 *hl-EndOfBuffer*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005209EndOfBuffer filler lines (~) after the last line in the buffer.
5210 By default, this is highlighted like |hl-NonText|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005211 *hl-ErrorMsg*
5212ErrorMsg error messages on the command line
5213 *hl-VertSplit*
5214VertSplit the column separating vertically split windows
5215 *hl-Folded*
5216Folded line used for closed folds
5217 *hl-FoldColumn*
5218FoldColumn 'foldcolumn'
5219 *hl-SignColumn*
5220SignColumn column where |signs| are displayed
5221 *hl-IncSearch*
5222IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with
5223 ":s///c"
5224 *hl-LineNr*
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005225LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number'
Bram Moolenaar64486672010-05-16 15:46:46 +02005226 or 'relativenumber' option is set.
Bram Moolenaarefae76a2019-10-27 22:54:58 +01005227 *hl-LineNrAbove*
5228LineNrAbove Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5229 option is set, above the cursor line.
5230 *hl-LineNrBelow*
5231LineNrBelow Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5232 option is set, below the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +02005233 *hl-CursorLineNr*
Bram Moolenaar89a9c152021-08-29 21:55:35 +02005234CursorLineNr Like LineNr when 'cursorline' is set and 'cursorlineopt'
5235 contains "number" or is "both", for the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005236 *hl-MatchParen*
5237MatchParen The character under the cursor or just before it, if it
5238 is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt|
5239
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005240 *hl-ModeMsg*
5241ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
5242 *hl-MoreMsg*
5243MoreMsg |more-prompt|
5244 *hl-NonText*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005245NonText '@' at the end of the window, characters from 'showbreak'
5246 and other characters that do not really exist in the text
5247 (e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character doesn't
5248 fit at the end of the line).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005249 *hl-Normal*
5250Normal normal text
Bram Moolenaar1c7715d2005-10-03 22:02:18 +00005251 *hl-Pmenu*
5252Pmenu Popup menu: normal item.
5253 *hl-PmenuSel*
5254PmenuSel Popup menu: selected item.
5255 *hl-PmenuSbar*
5256PmenuSbar Popup menu: scrollbar.
5257 *hl-PmenuThumb*
5258PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005259 *hl-Question*
5260Question |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005261 *hl-QuickFixLine*
5262QuickFixLine Current |quickfix| item in the quickfix window.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005263 *hl-Search*
5264Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch').
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005265 Also used for similar items that need to stand out.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005266 *hl-SpecialKey*
5267SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used
5268 to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'.
5269 Generally: text that is displayed differently from what it
5270 really is.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005271 *hl-SpellBad*
5272SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell|
5273 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar53180ce2005-07-05 21:48:14 +00005274 *hl-SpellCap*
5275SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. |spell|
5276 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005277 *hl-SpellLocal*
5278SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5279 used in another region. |spell|
5280 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
5281 *hl-SpellRare*
5282SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5283 hardly ever used. |spell|
5284 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005285 *hl-StatusLine*
5286StatusLine status line of current window
5287 *hl-StatusLineNC*
5288StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows
5289 Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in
5290 the status line of the current window.
Bram Moolenaar40962ec2018-01-28 22:47:25 +01005291 *hl-StatusLineTerm*
5292StatusLineTerm status line of current window, if it is a |terminal| window.
5293 *hl-StatusLineTermNC*
5294StatusLineTermNC status lines of not-current windows that is a |terminal|
5295 window.
Bram Moolenaarfaa959a2006-02-20 21:37:40 +00005296 *hl-TabLine*
5297TabLine tab pages line, not active tab page label
5298 *hl-TabLineFill*
5299TabLineFill tab pages line, where there are no labels
5300 *hl-TabLineSel*
5301TabLineSel tab pages line, active tab page label
Bram Moolenaardf980db2017-12-24 13:22:00 +01005302 *hl-Terminal*
5303Terminal |terminal| window (see |terminal-size-color|)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005304 *hl-Title*
5305Title titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
5306 *hl-Visual*
5307Visual Visual mode selection
5308 *hl-VisualNOS*
5309VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection".
5310 Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this.
5311 *hl-WarningMsg*
5312WarningMsg warning messages
5313 *hl-WildMenu*
5314WildMenu current match in 'wildmenu' completion
5315
Bram Moolenaarf75a9632005-09-13 21:20:47 +00005316 *hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005317The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005318statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005319
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00005320For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005321scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the
5322Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg,
5323and guifg.
5324
5325 *hl-Menu*
5326Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus.
5327 Also used for the toolbar.
5328 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5329
5330 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5331 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5332 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5333 set.
5334
5335 *hl-Scrollbar*
5336Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's
5337 scrollbars.
5338 Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg.
5339
5340 *hl-Tooltip*
5341Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips.
5342 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5343
5344 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5345 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5346 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5347 set.
5348
5349==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100535014. Linking groups *:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005351
5352When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you
5353can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight
5354group, and give the color attributes only for that group.
5355
5356To set a link:
5357
5358 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group}
5359
5360To remove a link:
5361
5362 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE
5363
5364Notes: *E414*
5365- If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You
5366 don't get an error message for a non-existing group.
5367- As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is
5368 removed.
5369- If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is
5370 not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a
5371 sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip
5372 links for groups that already have settings.
5373
5374 *:hi-default* *:highlight-default*
5375The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a
5376group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command
5377will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link.
5378
5379Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a
5380specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: >
5381 :highlight default link cComment Comment
5382If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: >
5383 :highlight link cComment Question
5384Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be
5385overruled when the syntax file is loaded.
5386
Bram Moolenaar23515b42020-11-29 14:36:24 +01005387To have a link survive `:highlight clear`, which is useful if you have
5388highlighting for a specific filetype and you want to keep it when selecting
5389another color scheme, put a command like this in the
5390"after/syntax/{filetype}.vim" file: >
5391 highlight! default link cComment Question
5392
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005393==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100539415. Cleaning up *:syn-clear* *E391*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005395
5396If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this
5397command: >
5398 :syntax clear
5399
5400This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting,
5401or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed
5402in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that
5403load the syntax file.
5404The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is
5405loaded after this command.
5406
Bram Moolenaar61da1bf2019-06-06 12:14:49 +02005407To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: >
5408 :syntax clear {group-name} ..
5409This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}.
5410
5411To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: >
5412 :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} ..
5413This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list.
5414
5415 *:syntax-off* *:syn-off*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005416If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove
5417the autocommands that load the syntax files: >
5418 :syntax off
5419
5420What this command actually does, is executing the command >
5421 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
5422See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work
5423$VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See |$VIMRUNTIME|.
5424
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005425 *:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset*
5426If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the
5427defaults back: >
5428
5429 :syntax reset
5430
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +02005431It is a bit of a wrong name, since it does not reset any syntax items, it only
5432affects the highlighting.
5433
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005434This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option.
5435
5436Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset
5437back to their Vim default.
5438Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color
5439scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost.
5440
5441What this actually does is: >
5442
5443 let g:syntax_cmd = "reset"
5444 runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim
5445
5446Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option.
5447
5448 *syncolor*
5449If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim
5450script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in
5451'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule
5452the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax
5453reset" command.
5454
5455For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: >
5456
5457 if &background == "light"
5458 highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
5459 else
5460 highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green
5461 endif
5462
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00005463 *E679*
5464Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the
5465'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an
5466endless loop.
5467
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005468Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether
5469your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This
5470depends on the color scheme file. See |:colorscheme|.
5471
5472 *syntax_cmd*
5473The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the
5474syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded:
5475 "on" ":syntax on" command. Highlight colors are overruled but
5476 links are kept
5477 "enable" ":syntax enable" command. Only define colors for groups that
5478 don't have highlighting yet. Use ":syntax default".
5479 "reset" ":syntax reset" command or loading a color scheme. Define all
5480 the colors.
5481 "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a
5482 syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set
5483 them.
5484
5485==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100548616. Highlighting tags *tag-highlight*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005487
5488If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following
5489mappings.
5490
5491 <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags.
5492 <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file.
5493>
5494 :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]*:\)\=\([^ ]*\).*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12>
5495 :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR>
5496
5497WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more
5498memory Vim will consume.
5499
5500Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you
5501must use Exuberant ctags (found at http://ctags.sf.net).
5502
5503Put these lines in your Makefile:
5504
5505# Make a highlight file for types. Requires Exuberant ctags and awk
5506types: types.vim
5507types.vim: *.[ch]
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005508 ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005509 awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\
5510 {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@
5511
5512And put these lines in your .vimrc: >
5513
5514 " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists
5515 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') . '/types.vim'
5516 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname)
5517 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] exe 'so ' . fname
5518 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif
5519
5520==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100552117. Window-local syntax *:ownsyntax*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005522
5523Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is
5524possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own
5525private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source
5526with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source
5527highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold,
5528italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here.
5529
5530To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other
5531windows on the buffer: >
5532 :ownsyntax foo
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005533< *w:current_syntax*
5534This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo". The value of
5535"b:current_syntax" does not change. This is implemented by saving and
5536restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set
5537"b:current_syntax". The value set by the syntax file is assigned to
5538"w:current_syntax".
Bram Moolenaared32d942014-12-06 23:33:00 +01005539Note: This resets the 'spell', 'spellcapcheck' and 'spellfile' options.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005540
5541Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005542on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely,
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02005543syntax commands executed from that window do not affect other windows on the
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005544same buffer.
5545
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005546A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer
5547is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded.
5548When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005549
5550==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100555118. Color xterms *xterm-color* *color-xterm*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005552
5553Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the
5554default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: >
5555 :if &term =~ "xterm"
5556 : if has("terminfo")
5557 : set t_Co=8
5558 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm
5559 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm
5560 : else
5561 : set t_Co=8
5562 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5563 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5564 : endif
5565 :endif
5566< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5567
5568You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal,
5569e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm".
5570
5571Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may
5572be wrong.
5573 *xiterm* *rxvt*
5574The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too.
5575But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: >
5576 :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm
5577 :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm
5578<
5579 *colortest.vim*
5580To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution.
Bram Moolenaarf740b292006-02-16 22:11:02 +00005581To use it, execute this command: >
5582 :runtime syntax/colortest.vim
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005583
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005584Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005585output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined
5586at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground
5587colors, when 't_Co' is 8.
5588
5589 *xfree-xterm*
5590To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005591included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005592at: >
5593 http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html
5594Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the
5595termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it
5596supports. >
5597 ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query
5598If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings.
5599(Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding).
5600
5601This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): >
5602 :if has("terminfo")
5603 : set t_Co=16
5604 : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm
5605 : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm
5606 :else
5607 : set t_Co=16
5608 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5609 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5610 :endif
5611< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5612
5613Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically
5614translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm".
5615Colors above 16 are also translated automatically.
5616
5617For 256 colors this has been reported to work: >
5618
5619 :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm
5620 :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm
5621
5622Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color"
5623and try if that works.
5624
5625You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file):
5626 XTerm*color0: #000000
5627 XTerm*color1: #c00000
5628 XTerm*color2: #008000
5629 XTerm*color3: #808000
5630 XTerm*color4: #0000c0
5631 XTerm*color5: #c000c0
5632 XTerm*color6: #008080
5633 XTerm*color7: #c0c0c0
5634 XTerm*color8: #808080
5635 XTerm*color9: #ff6060
5636 XTerm*color10: #00ff00
5637 XTerm*color11: #ffff00
5638 XTerm*color12: #8080ff
5639 XTerm*color13: #ff40ff
5640 XTerm*color14: #00ffff
5641 XTerm*color15: #ffffff
5642 Xterm*cursorColor: Black
5643
5644[Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the
5645cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005646newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005647
5648To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database
5649Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): >
5650 xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults
5651<
5652 *xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor*
5653To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas
5654Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with
5655these resources:
5656 XTerm*cursorBlink: on
5657 XTerm*cursorOnTime: 400
5658 XTerm*cursorOffTime: 250
5659 XTerm*cursorColor: White
5660
5661 *hpterm-color*
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005662These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005663foreground colors: >
5664 :if has("terminfo")
5665 : set t_Co=8
5666 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS
5667 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5668 :else
5669 : set t_Co=8
5670 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS
5671 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5672 :endif
5673< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5674
5675 *Eterm* *enlightened-terminal*
5676These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal
5677emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the
5678bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. >
5679 :set t_Co=16
5680 :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m
5681 :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m
5682<
5683 *TTpro-telnet*
5684These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware /
5685open-source program for MS-Windows. >
5686 set t_Co=16
5687 set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm
5688 set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm
5689Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure
5690that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled.
5691(info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>)
5692
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005693
5694==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100569519. When syntax is slow *:syntime*
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005696
5697This is aimed at authors of a syntax file.
5698
5699If your syntax causes redrawing to be slow, here are a few hints on making it
5700faster. To see slowness switch on some features that usually interfere, such
5701as 'relativenumber' and |folding|.
5702
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02005703Note: this is only available when compiled with the |+profile| feature.
5704You many need to build Vim with "huge" features.
5705
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005706To find out what patterns are consuming most time, get an overview with this
5707sequence: >
5708 :syntime on
5709 [ redraw the text at least once with CTRL-L ]
5710 :syntime report
5711
5712This will display a list of syntax patterns that were used, sorted by the time
5713it took to match them against the text.
5714
5715:syntime on Start measuring syntax times. This will add some
5716 overhead to compute the time spent on syntax pattern
5717 matching.
5718
5719:syntime off Stop measuring syntax times.
5720
5721:syntime clear Set all the counters to zero, restart measuring.
5722
5723:syntime report Show the syntax items used since ":syntime on" in the
5724 current window. Use a wider display to see more of
5725 the output.
5726
5727 The list is sorted by total time. The columns are:
5728 TOTAL Total time in seconds spent on
5729 matching this pattern.
5730 COUNT Number of times the pattern was used.
5731 MATCH Number of times the pattern actually
5732 matched
5733 SLOWEST The longest time for one try.
5734 AVERAGE The average time for one try.
5735 NAME Name of the syntax item. Note that
5736 this is not unique.
5737 PATTERN The pattern being used.
5738
5739Pattern matching gets slow when it has to try many alternatives. Try to
5740include as much literal text as possible to reduce the number of ways a
5741pattern does NOT match.
5742
5743When using the "\@<=" and "\@<!" items, add a maximum size to avoid trying at
5744all positions in the current and previous line. For example, if the item is
5745literal text specify the size of that text (in bytes):
5746
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005747"<\@<=span" Matches "span" in "<span". This tries matching with "<" in
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005748 many places.
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005749"<\@1<=span" Matches the same, but only tries one byte before "span".
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005750
5751
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02005752 vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: